Home

User Manual

1. 264 Colour CONC NETTES 265 LUNCA CANS corani aE a E O a a a 265 ONS ice seis ete wees acre reesei E E 267 FACETS INS T T T TT TT 267 CESS COURS m TT 270 Type seperated class components esses 270 Class CRO rr 272 BOON NO ONG oerein ec 277 ATermallVe TOOITIS saschinuvccentnd ors snmurincnietshreretersnrandeacentivbineieimbabarinbipeessais 2 8 Alt malive TOOK TINO sees casaseniae Simi uud e hnatFidat dedisset iani arai ariken RR EM EA U IU ai 2 8 Room aMOCALON MEER pianeantsanu staan an ianiai 280 FAO MICA ACI T 281 Alternative room chain 1ccccccsesecccnsscecccssaueccnsacseeecnausesesscusesensudueessaauesessansesssaes 281 OOM OPMS ANON sssrinin TT 282 Changing home rooms for classes and teachers sssssssss 287 OE TOO araar e EE E EOE EE 290 Slan Ume Graduat ERR eismo erre E rE rr a T ai 291 DEEE V 292 Main SUDJECIS sirri rin aaa E AR 295 Fringe periods and optional subjects 296 Subject Segue 6G Sons tduoaescHixeEUBd Sun Dedu aa lia Drkcob Vua GR RC es EPORUEE SLE 297 Positive subject sequence esssessssssesseeesee nennen nnn nnns 297 Negative subject sequence ccccseeecceeeececcaeeeeeeeseecsaueecssaneeesaaeeessaesessaaes 298
2. essceeeennmH Hm 242 Details overview timetables esesscese mmm 246 Pago SOUND WT 248 BACKOrOUNG M I 249 Headerand TOOLEN NR E m 250 Several classes on one timetable seesseeessseseseeeeeennnene 251 Timetables in HTML format iuusnexaz invevue as Biudii exu v Mum 978 der RU REY rv bim eS aaa cO 252 Import and export of views cesse eese eene eene nennen 254 Using the clipboard osorssicdusixiemiv i kasessduzdird ruv ome vi d ndC Z0 FIXE ME UUSdNID ES SURKNVE EE 255 USER TIPS insine XE REA SERERE MEIN RE NEUEUEMN Eni 257 SCOS asec sector acces n 257 Buceo T 257 SOOO Cia ea EE E E AE EE E E D VIDE 257 7 e E E A A E A 257 Miscellaneous Settings joc incssctacecnnacmenamscodenseasianboadskuniuciniduenecBotosedccesdumpeciate 258 Licence Data ENT OT ETT 259 SE Maice SUS REESE 260 Specified time requests ccccccsssesceeceeeeceeseeeesceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseegeeeeeseaeeees 260 Unspecified time requests ccccccseeecccssseceseeceeceeuseesaueeeeseseesseeeeessaneeeeas 261 Copying time requests ccceeecceeesseeeceseeeceesececeeeeeseeeeeeeuseeeesuaeeeseneeeesaneess 263 Contents 9 Deleting time requests cccccccseseeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseueesseeecsaueessueessaeeesageesaes 263 Seri Mom
3. Gyr ymnasium v Description v Marked m Home Econ room v Lock x Class Room 1a Rib Don t Print M Class Room 1b R2a Stat Code s Class Room 2a R2b v Dept class Room 2 ix v Rm Weight ass Room 3a a Pseudo Room 1 3b Ala xad A Sues wv Capacity Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a v Corridor v Corridor v T v Codes v Modified in term Adjust Column Width Adjust All Columns Strg E Adjust all columns to their content Strg F Customise Use this menu to hide or show individual columns by ticking the items you want to display All Elements 15 Note v Mame v Full name v Altern room v Text Description Marked m Lock X Don t Print M Stat Code s Dept v Rm Weight Off site codes Corridor Corridor T v Codes v Modified in term Adjust Column Width Adjust All Columns Strg E Adjust all columns to their content Strg F Customise 16 gp Untis Standard Package All Elements R E Customising the view The Customise function allows you to change the settings of the E Master Data window to suit your personal preferences l The number and type of special functions displayed on the menu ee as list under lt Customise gt depend on the active type of element Click nla ian E on the lt Customise gt button not on the small triangle used to open Substitute room in lesson list the list of special functions to customise your settings The dialogue window
4. E H a a r ay s P i gm tere Software SEAE ruber amp Pay Aclual week number az Lied in the Mukesh modde Cem Full name ofthe Erm as used onthe multiterrm module Termi 24 3 30 6 Timetable 2007 2008 i D c eI A N Short name of the timetable format Display d Timetables Footer Grubor t Potions Bolimware fe Filename v Tiie Range v Schacl week F Calenda week E Type of Wook A B Tern Page 1 Printing Several classes on one timetable When a class is divided into two components for instance a science Divided classes and a languages branch but the timetables of the two components differ in only a few key respects it can be useful to issue the timetables of both class components on a single timetable To do this enter the combined class name of the classes whose timetables you want to print on a single timetable in the aem Master class TT print out m field under Master Data Eli D x 9 amp 21 48 Cl Grp Mo Room Consec Pe Main sub 106 3 4 J 10a 2 06 3 10a 2 06 3 2 J Fulnane name TT title 4 la Classes Name b 10a 10a_L 10a_5 1a The example shows a class with a science 10a S anda languages component 10a L The period details window shows that the students of the science branch 10a S are scheduled to h
5. Underlined Sort pas r Cover Planning Print pA 4 No absence reason daily abs Do not print empty rows No absence daily absence I Print black white Only cover periods IV Auto size for the details window IV Use alias for details window legend Show a m p m division line HTML index pg with full names Cancel Apply Help Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Cluster EON Rub DE R1a 1a 150 gp Untis Standard Package Scheduling Periods on the Timetable SS Class 1a Gauss L Cla BE iani XI If you want to lock all the T i periods in a timetable display TA Pare 5 21 the column X Locked in the lesson window via lt Grid z Adjustment gt and tick the D R i ETR k y use the Codes tab in the form view of the lesson window If you want to lock all the scheduled lessons of a class teacher subject or room use the appropriate function in the master data of the element you want to lock Bile Fla PL Fia SH2 Moving periods Periods can easily be moving from one slot on the timetable to another Please see the following example Open the file demo gpn and close all open windows Ctrl K Exam ple Opena class timetable and switch to class 3a Left click on Monday period 7 hold down the mouse button and drag the period away Drop the period in any slot on the timetable
6. L L M m O r all periods in the same room 94 schedule class group later 96 p m only double periods 97 variable teacher 96 locked 93 keep current loading pattern 61 65 scheduling dialogue 166 3 Siehe time requests A abbreviations printing alegend 246 afternoon pers week min max 68 alias second name 58 63 S U V X Y Index 311 in the period window 228 alias name 66 89 Alt HRm 162 Alt Rm 162 alternative room 56 assess the active time slot scheduling dialogue 184 auto size for the details window 233 B background printing a background picture 249 block period block 307 weighting 115 saving a block 152 block size 91 break supervisions in the tt 228 C C no single periods 95 Cap capacity 162 capacity room 57 CCC analysis 119 119 146 chained swaps scheduling dialogue 196 Cla layout 214 clash class clash scheduling dialogue 176 room clash scheduling dialogue 177 teacher clash scheduling dialogue 177 312 gp Untis Standard Package Index Class Clash Code 92 class groups 59 class level 59 class teacher 239 Class es input field lessons 88 clip board 98 clipboard 255 cluster simultaneous lessons in the tt period window 228 colour lessons 86 master data 52 colour codes in the tt 235 column headings in the tt 235 combined class names 2a 2b gt 2ab 230 comprehensive tt overviews 306 consecutive swaps scheduling dialogue 193 control
7. Type of Timetable Class TT Students C Teacher TT C RoomTT New field Change field Delete field Align fields Start and end time Window size 34x 18 Scale 5 1 Timetable Settings Number Subject joo Bok Itali Une gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views Timetable period window The next steps describe how to modify the contents of the period window timetable period Several fields in the timetable period window o Cancel T Apply Help r Field type Subject Short name E Max characters 8 Layout 01 Individual timetable wit C Teacher TT Row heading _Heading individ TT In the new timetable view or under Timetable Classes in the file demo gpn click on lt Timetable Settings gt and select Per iod window This will open the graphics editor that can be used to modify the contents of the timetable period window At present only the subject is displayed in the period In addition to the subject you want to display the teacher and the room of the lesson Click on lt New field gt In the selection block Field type select Teacher and click on lt OK gt Re peat the same process for the room 18 x Pe General Selection range Layout 1 Layc View CSD Class Screen Display Layout Font Arial 9 0 eA Day names headir nem Layout 01 Individ across the
8. C Bold C Italic E C Underlined Select the field type Room and click on lt OK gt mi C Right aligned 1 S u Centred z 224 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views Q Align the text in the fields on the left When the field has approximately the right size and position click on Align Fields This function re sizes all the fields of Teacher TT i Room TT Delete field Alignfields 1 Bold o Italic C Start and end time 3 1a Class 1a Gauss Timetable Cla1 E mo Si Classes 17 3 2007 28 6 2008 Time range MA Arist R1a GEc Hug Ria MU Call Ria MU Call R1a zs EE T Nob Ria L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time TET Arist PEG SH2 1a 1b Sport 3 Rub PEB SH1 1a 1b Stud Specialtext Cluster Layout 01 Period window Contents fields of a teaching pe Sel Type of Timetable Field type Subject Class TT Students 5 Max characters Subject Arial 9 0 Newfield Change field 100 z Font size as a percentage __New eld _Change feid 100 y Fontes C Underlined Window size 124 x 47 Left aligned Scale 4 1 Right alianed Centred 1Su 1Te 1Ro 25u 2Te 99 approximately the same size to a same uniform size and aligns the fields along a horizontal and vertical line 3 lt The timetable now displays the
9. mm ccc p display subjects or subject lesson numbers in the middle part of the window Fr E Help Note Display When changing the width of the first column of the middle window the other columns are adjusted automatically Lesson number C Subject Physics Practical Physics Theory Sequence in a week The week sequence allows you to specify the order of class lessons during the week This function is designed for use with lessons with one or two periods per week Example You want the software to schedule one period of practical Physics in the lab for class 6 sometime after all the Physics Theory lessons have taken place F Lesson Sequence ix Enter the sequence in a week as shown in the example Lesson Sequence of the left to instruct gp Untis to schedule lesson 100 after lesson 99 Lesson 99 could now be scheduled cmm Add Remove Help for Monday 4 and lesson 100 for Thursday 5 Display e Lesson number C Subject C L No Subject g Class 6 L Cla Curie Physics 6 Practical after theory Class Subject Gauss Physics 6 Theory before practicall 6 Physics Theory Curie B Physics Practical Simultaneous lessons In certain circumstances for instance after a data transfer from gp Curs it may be desirable but not essential to schedule different lessons at the same time This can be achieved using the Simultaneous lessons func
10. he Scheduling Dialogue For example enter the abbreviated name of Sports Hall 1 SH1 on the timetable The software responds by displaying the room availability Tuesday M ehe 3 Les 53 Tea Rub x Shortcut keys Most of the scheduling dialogue functions can be activated via shortcut keys i e without the use of the mouse Use Ctrl lt Tab gt to switch between individual windows within gp Untis When the scheduling dialogue is open a purple rectangle highlights the active part of the scheduling dialogue In the example below the active cell is marked with a red circle Y Scheduling Dialogue d E eo a ae 20 3 2007 30 6 2008 Monday oe _ Unscheduled Information History Chained swaps Periods 5 1 1b Arist MA 1 2b Callas DE Hugo DE Allunsched periods Tuesday Wednesday s isle le h l2 ls a s je 7 le hh 2 s 4 s fo r Is MA 1 2 Switch between the different parts of the window using F6 or lt Shift gt lt F6 gt 189 190 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue In the upper part of the scheduling dialogue use Alt Left Arrow and Alt Right Arrow to move from tab to tab Within a tab use the Tab key to move between individual elements In the middle part of the scheduling dialogue use the cursor keys to control the cursor I
11. A timetable in a word processing programme SUP COM LIB SUP JAS R10 LIBT LIB IHI SEE TT of per element Other element in period Next element in period v Lock Type Lock Timetable Resize the window Timetable Settings Allocate Delete this room Lock Period lt F7 gt Copy in HTML Format 1 1 t 2 5cm Ln 1 E Microsoft Excel Bilvertsz ied File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Col 1 A IJ a a qz IJ T dq c gp m jg mpm Jg IA sEEM Mo Tu we mhm mr Fr KAR RAM ITHIN SEEM TTHIN SEEM LIB R106 LIBT LIB English U S gt Right click on the timetable you want to export and select Copy in HTML format gt Switch to your spread sheet programme and insert the contents of the clipboard via Edit Paste or Ctrl V Window Set Up 257 User tips This chapter describes additional options and useful settings not covered under master data and lessons Settings Settings Modules 1 1 Ti G id Use the Settings menu to enter various other useful settings The seheci Data most important of these will be introduced in the following section ns Miscellaneous Print Licence Data Time Grid v Main Toolbar v Toolbar v Status bar The functions of the time grid are described in detail in the brochure gp Untis Getting Started Light Mode School data Use the School Data window to ent
12. Four of the five periods of this lesson have already been scheduled All the positions where the remaining period can be scheduled in the grid are marked with the symbol and a number e g 2 in the lesson row The lower the number the more suitable the slot for scheduling the remaining period he Scheduling Dialogue f Scheduling Dialoque res Tuesday creed harte Frider je 15 19 11 f i258 79 Tr 7e t4 11s in jr FP les 30 a Cia fib RE PEG DE DF DK RF MA DS Gf PEG MJ MA DE MA AR AR AR TX HM DS MA fe EFC DE TE OK Tea Ans J 18 4 4 1 to gt tb 4 Ja t la b 4 4 tt 1 l 3 2b 25b a J3 b 4 Rm Rib b b ib th 1b 1b 1b tb ib Jb 1b ib 1b 4 tb tb ib 4 poate eos 1e 18 te te Tem Hugo 4 4 ja 2 24 4 28 4 4 Rm Ris je 4 A je 1e 1 1e 1e je 4 Ta te 284 la te te te X Ja 3e a te lo LNo Toa Sub Rm Cla Time Stud Specialt Cluster a aa The example shows that Sat 1 marked 1 is the most suitable slot for the lesson The deciding factors are the core time for the class 3 and the fact that scheduling the period at a different time would create a non permissible double period e g Fri 4 5 and violate the time request of teacher Arist 1 Place the cursor on Sat 1 and click on Schedule the period Alternatively schedule the period via double click or by pressing the Insert key When scheduling a period in a slot for which the desired room is unava
13. Tick the option One timetable for each week if you want to print a separate timetable per week for each selected element see example on the right This is a particularly useful option for schools with irregular lessons The number of weeks for which timetables are printed depends on the date setting entered under lt Timetable Settings gt Tick the option New page for each element if you want the timetables for each new element to start on a new page 5 52008 10 5 2008 Unts UK Ltd ap Untis2007 Timetable2007 2008 ap Untis2007 Timetable2007 2008 12 Walid from 10 October 12 Valid from 10 October 1a 1a Class 1a Gauss Class 1a Gauss 243 244 gp Untis Stan Settings Font size in Per overview fi 00 Coupl legend 100 fi 00 Heading 3 gp Untis MultiUser 2007 demo TE PEER Page 1 Timetable dard Package Printing Legend A legend will be printed whenever there is insufficient space in the period window to display all the relevant details of a lesson For a class timetable such details include rooms subjects teachers and time restrictions if any Use the option Placement of the legend to specify the location of the legend on the page or to print the legend on a separate page Additionally you can specify the number of columns in the legend the use of alias names and if the legend should be printed in frames The font size of the
14. Empty rows will not be printed This option allows for considerable savings in paper especially for overview timetables with formats 20 or 30 and space timetables in HTML format Auto size for the details window Automatically resizes the period details window bottom part of the timetable window to fit the contents Print black amp white Allows colour coding on screen displays but black amp white print on printed timetables Highlight changed periods Allows you to customise the highlighting of changed periods for use with the timetable comparison function and the Cover Planning Layout 2 HTML module The example shows changes on the Changed Periods gt regular timetable highlighted in red bold and pi marked with an C Italic Emphasised by Underlined 234 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views EJ m le ri simae break Full name Mumba of das Zen Hume ol reeks AZ Humber of dec m Humber of weeks 42 Humbe of free daus dae bo School Holidays The timetable formats 1 and 10 display the free days entered under Master Data School Holidays when the timetable display is set to weeks Timetable Settings Selection range Calendar week Chr stress braak Puides of school holds 1 L H Tea Subj Rm Cla Tene mud Special fof ou a An amp L MA m la Font The overall size of the timetab
15. Details available via the drop down Selection list SS Page setup Type of list Unspecified day requests Y Data fields Day time requests Period time requests Teachers of the class A detailed description of these print functions can be found in the relevant chapters below Cancel Time Agu teachs of t class Unspecified day reguests Entering new elements The following example demonstrates how to enter new elements in the master data views gt Start gp Untis load the file demo gpn and close all other windows Ctrl K gt Open the standard master data view Classes Master Data Classes The asterisk in the first column of the last empty row in the grid view marks the row where a new element can be entered P Place the cursor in the column Name of the last free row in the grid view enter the number 5 and confirm by pressing Tab or Enter Class zb Andersen Rab Class 3a Aristoteles R3a Class 3b Talasi Ps Class 4 Mabel You have created a new class 5 Now enter the remaining attributes such as Full Name and Room E amp E E E fF Alternatively you can click on lt New gt in the tool bar of the window The cursor automatically moves to the last empty row of the grid view Again you need to confirm the input by pressing lt Tab gt or lt Enter gt Moving elements You can modify the order in which the individual elements appear
16. GRUBER amp PETTERS SOFTWARE 0 Untis meane User Manual English Version September 2007 GRUBER amp PEITERS SOFIWARE 3 A 2000 Stockerau Belvederegasse 11 e 43 2266 62241 0 e office grupet at e www grupet at Contents Contents FOREWORD T 10 MASTER DATA c 11 The All Elements window eere rere enne 12 Managing the window s iscositiia i mceaciutid wid d rada zc Ended 12 DVO VITA TOUS ee r DM M MEM UM E UI ME M EE EUM 13 Moving CO DIAS 14 Sorting d ta PC o Uo c NRI REOR 14 PUO SOWING COMMIS eosiescsi esas IY tmaste te tata detras ebo leo EEE TEE ETORREN 15 CUSTOMISING ME VEW cases cc scene asec cere ee ete ib D it Meu ie LE 16 IS E EAE NE E EE TES 17 uin 19 Entering new eleliellls etate itae repetat eru E die sea cr ores anre E 3o nona eu c Eae Hu US 19 WIE cM 20 Resizing the WINQOW 20 Time M cold c RETE 21 ODODIU TURCO eee ene eee nee ot ees ere uti iE Haier ceat rece eee i 21 Bruder 22 Entering data using Drag amp Drop from the Element Rollup 22 Entering data by selecting from the element list seeessssus 24 Entering element names Via the keyboard eeeeeeee 25 Serial in
17. Label locked periods with a mark Manually locked periods are marked with an asterisk User Defined Views 231 Separate periods in case of clash Use this option to display conflicting periods see Manual Timetabling on p 152 in separate cells on the screen the printout and the HTML output Ja Class Za Hugo Jimetable Akal E Db S kY ey d x t Pe area HI Hug EN Pharr an mince a pmi ra ae Tea Subj Rm Cla l stud Special Callas MA R18 2a 2b 3a 3b 4 New PH PO 2a Time Sort periods When several lessons take General Selection range Layout Layout 2 place in the same period on the same week day but in dif ferent weeks sort the lessons by start date using this function The following example shows the timetable of a vocational school with block lessons Pernod window Iv Double periods like single periods Comb class names 28 2b gt Zab a Label couplings with a dot Iv Label locked panas with a mark eparate perian case of clash dz Sort periads 232 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views The teacher Figaro teaches three block lessons at three different times The hair dressing block 1 starts on 5 9 and ends on 26 9 hair dressing block 2 is from 27 9 31 10 and block 3 from 1 11 5 12 Normally the three blocks are shown on the timetable in the order in which they were entered into cour
18. Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a 2 4 m e e MT gt Resize window Time requests Open the Time requests window for the active element by clicking on lt Time requests gt Since time requests play a central role in the gp Untis programme the manual devotes an entire chapter to the topic see User tips Time requests p 260 Special functions In addition to the lt Customise gt function described above you can call up further special functions for classes and teachers by clicking on lt Special Functions gt also see the chapter Home rooms for classes and teachers on p 287 under User tips D Time requests RI New room gt lesson list Modified room gt lesson list Substitute room tin lesson list Customise 21 22 gp Untis Standard Package All Elements Master Data Lessons Sche Classes Teachers Rooms Subjects Students All Elements Term Overview Departments Corridors Descriptions Alias Names School Holidays Deduction grounds Reasons of absence Display Master Data Data input Once an element has been created you can assign different attributes to the element by entering additional data in the grid Some input fields allow you to activate or deactivate certain attributes by ticking the appropriate box e g Lock X Other fields allow you to enter alpha numerical data e g text while a third type of field is designed to accommodate existing element names e g alterna
19. Tea Subi o fime Sud Special ted Lio Tea Subj Em Cla Tima Sud Special tst e Te Tima 41 Huge GEc Ala Ja 1b 2a 2b n Huga tiie Rim ta 16 2a Jb Te Arist PEG GHI 335 3 13 Huh PE f SHI 34 3h LHe Ten Sub Rm Cia 209 210 gp Untis Standard Package Window Set Up Settings Font size in Per overview f 00 Coupl legend 100 Heading Timetable Period details window Since there is often not enough space in the individual cells of the timetable to display all the relevant data for the active period gp Untis provides a third window for the display of such information the period details window The font used in the period details window can be changed via Timetable Settings The period details window provides the following lesson details L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Cluster 74 Curie PEG SH2 4 3 New PEB SH1 4 L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud New MA R1a Ps1 3h Ta 94 Rub PER SH1 ENG Tea Subj Rm Cla New GA R2a L Ma Tea Subj Rm Cla Arist PEG SH2 1a 1b 1a 2a 2b 1b Time Time Stud A week A L No The example in the column L No shows lesson number 74 Below the lesson number you will see the time request entered for the active period under Master Data Classes 3 Tea Subj Rm The sec
20. Teachers Classes Subjects Main Subjects Unimportant Extremely important Lesson not to be held in fringe period if code G Cancel Apply Help Code G has the opposite effect Subjects marked G Not a fringe period are not scheduled in fringe periods Subject Sequences 297 Subject sequences Subject sequence codes can be entered for subjects and lessons Subject sequence codes entered for subjects apply to the entire school codes entered for lessons only apply to the classes and teachers involved in the lesson Positive subject sequence Classes It may be desirable for pedagogical or organisational reasons to schedule certain subjects in sequence For example to allow time for a two period written exam you want Example to schedule the subjects German DE and Math MA in sequence It is irrelevant in this case if the sequence is DE MA or MA DE Version 1 35 subjects Sub ni xl Applies to the entire school FANE DKE Sl Ie c Enter the same numerical subject sequence mame code under Master Data Subjects for s both subjects e g 5 see example onthe w eerman rig ht f E Wia Mathematics come Version 2 Geography and Economics Ls Appli icular cl g pplies to a particular class e g class 4 Nobel class 4 1D x Enter a numerical subject Fl RSD x Xr ne sequence code under Lessons Na Cl Classes in the relevant lesson B E a
21. Time range H Timetable comparison Only modified m ml k Time Stud Special te H v Timetable comparison TN nly modified timetables 306 gp Untis Standard Package Timetable Comparison I wmm Castade Tin Feier d Tile vertical Aming Doors Chose Ad Windows CTRL ee w 1 La Clu Da orsi Timetable 71a Window Groups both versions that contain differences Close the message box by clicking on lt OK gt When this function is active you can only scroll through timetables that contain changes Timetables with identical contents are no longer displayed The function Timetable comparison allows you to compare the following timetable formats gt Single timetables i e two timetables of format 01 or 10 are usually displayed side by side gt Comprehensive overviews i e two timetables with format 20 or 30 provide an overview of the timetables of the entire school Window groups Different timetabling tasks often require the instant availability of very different types of data When assigning teachers to lessons for example you may find that an open scheduling dialogue is more a hindrance than a help Equally the presence of a weighting window on screen would unnecessarily clutter up the screen when all you are trying to do is some manual fine tuning of the timetable gp Untis solves this problem with the Window Groups function that allows you to set up the screen for a specific timeta
22. When the optimisation tool is unable to schedule a lesson in a designated alternative room the room optimisation function ensures that the lesson takes place in the designated home room instead The software attempts to allocate the same room to a class or teacher for the duration of an entire half day This is of particular importance for classes without a designated room These should be allocated with the aid of pseudo rooms Preference is given to alternative rooms listed close to the designated room in the alternative room chain Room Logic 283 gt Therooms specified in a Lessons window take precedence over alternative rooms This is of particular importance for classes without a designated room A class without a designated room must never displace another class from its designated home room and can only be scheduled for a home room that is readily available gt Whenalesson is marked r All periods in the same room on the Codes tab under Lessons Teachers or Lessons Classes the room optimisation tool attempts to schedule all the periods of the lesson in the same room while at the same time taking the room capacity into account Rooms that are not designated home rooms are allocated first and preferentially to double periods and period blocks The following example demonstrates the function of the room Example optimisation tool Open the file demo1 gpn Seven classes are listed under Master Da
23. gp Untis takes into account gt The walking times for teachers and students to off site subject rooms and classrooms gt The walking times for teachers and students from off site subject rooms and classrooms back to the main building Itis advisable to reduce the number of times teachers and students are obliged to move between main and off site buildings to an abso lute minimum The following example shows how to do this For teachers who teach both in the main building and at off site locations enter the number 1 under Subject sequence Teachers for lessons that take place in the main building and the number 2 for lessons that take place in the off site building X Rubens L Tea 2a2b38 talb SHI 2b2a SHI 3a3b SHI 1a Main building ho oo N B z D elim wow LS N ali Rub Rub Rub M FM NNN XO CQ C Teacher Subject Classfes Subject room Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Cod 4 1 E PEG 1a 1b SH2 Ps1 2 Rub PEB 1a 1b SH1 Rib zs gp Untis will then attempt to schedule as many periods as possible in the same building for the teacher Off site rooms without graduated lesson starts If you are unable to graduate lesson starts as described in the previous section you need to schedule one free period each for the walk to and from the off site location for teachers and students Instruct the software accordingly by entering off site codes A E fo
24. gt Activate the fields for number of male and female students Female and Male via the grid adjustment dialogue gt Click on Print Preview and confirm the selection by clicking on OK 40 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views The Print Preview on your screen should correspond approximately to the figure below Jis Intis2007 Timetable 2007 2008 Test schaal DEMO 05 03 07 22 11 Valid fram 10 October For demo and test ony Class Ha Class ta Gaus Ria f 6 class Te Newton RIE Ba Class 2a Hugo Ra i 3 o 12 14 Printing Master 3 cess3h Calas Pa 4 12 4 8 bu Gruber amp Petters Software Customising column headings You can customise column headings to suit your individual print requirements The following example demonstrates how to change the standard Example headings in columns containing student data gt Openthe grid adjustment dialogue of the standard master data view Classes from the previous example P Select the Print tab You can enter up to two separate lines in each field containing a heading E Grid Adjustment gt Enter Female students in the C Que row Female Number of female students under General Print Heading 1 and Female Field Print Tot Bol Ww Heading Heading 2 Description p up i Su nder Heading 2 Name Full name Room Female Male
25. 3 3a Class 3a Aristoteles Timetable CITTAD E Ub oo Sie 3 zs nn 1 5005 45 UM PH GEc New 2 855940 RE TE Nobel 3 9 50 10 35 BI HI Cer R3a 4 10 45 11 20 KA TX Gauss Curie Ek EdEDx vm L No ClTe Per Teacher Subjegt Total 1 5 34 00 26 Classes Subject roo Home Room Double per Block 26 24 3 0 do 37 1 Calas 2a2b 3a R2a PL 2 2 2 Calas 3a 3b R3a 11 S 76 22 3 Arist 3a 3b SH2 R3a ZEN 79 2 Ander x 3a3b PL R3a 1 4 B 1425 15 10 1 4 Gauss MA o 3a R3a 2 New PH 3a Gym R3a LN 2 Hugo 3a Ra 4 Ander DE 3a R3a 4 Ander 3a PL R3a 2 Nobel 3a R3a 2 Rub 3a R3a s ce INE 3a R3a l2 Cer Bl 3a R3a AB CHR 3a R3a NE NE ORC 3a R3a Example 2 There are three subject groups Each student chooses one of the groups and attends all the lessons offered within this group Conflicts between the individual groups are therefore permissible Assign the same CCC letter to all lessons that must not be in conflict with other lessons Assign a different CCC letter to all lessons where conflicts are permissible Subjects CCC French and Italian Chemistry and Physics B Literature and Drama Subject Sequences Please note that entering a CCC permits but does not enforcethe Note creation of a conflict between lessons Consequently the diagnosis tool will not display a NTP for classes when the lessons marked with the class
26. 3b R1a Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a NNNNNNN amp R d CQ OQ 4 OOO II SI ISI LT ET ET L1 ET E Time Requests This function allows the user to enter time requests Time requests Time requests for elements are graded from 3 completely blocked to 3 period should definitely be scheduled Since time requests are of major importance for all elements and lessons an entire chapter is devoted to this subject in the section User tips below 52 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views Colour Tip Free colour choice with master data Pseudo Room 2 43 ER m Settings Colour This button can be used to assign different foreground and background colours to individual elements The selected colours are displayed in the master data grids on the screen but not on printouts on the standard printouts of timetables and in the planning tool displays scheduling dialogue planning timetable Other gp Untis modules such as the Cover Planning module also allow the colour coding of elements You can assign the same colour to several elements simultaneously by highlighting the desired elements prior to clicking on Colour coding If you want to display timetable colours on the screen but not on printouts select the setting Black and white print for the desired timetable format via Settings in the respective timetable window am Rooms Roo Full name Altern room Rm Weight Marken par
27. Another settings option allows you to specify how the differences M Red f Bold between the two versions should be displayed Open a timetable italic e g Timetable Classes click on Timetable Settings and Emphasised by open the Layout 2 tab to view and select different display options Underlined The lt Timetable Settings gt button can only be activated when no Timetable timetable comparison is active Settings For purposes of clarity and to allow the highlighting of periods found to be different the normal timetable highlights and colour codes will be suppressed Start a timetable comparison as follows Ini Open a timetable e g Timetable Classes and if necessary enlarge the upper part of the window the details window until the combo box Timetable comparison becomes visible Activate the function by ticking the box ES EN Class es v 2 School week B Tu 253 29 Periods week 0 Unscheduled per nl modified timetable H H Timetable ups Mon Tues Wed Satu The timetable comparison dialogue window will appear and instruct you to start gp Untis IEEE ox a second time Specify if you want to OPEN Forthe timetable comparison gp Untis has to be started a second time the current file a second time or if you want to open a different file patate 303 304 gp Untis Standard Package Timetable Comparison Note E Tennlable com
28. Callas Nobel Rub Cer L No CI Te ps pa L1 BC BC BT REL PEL BT NON YN Cn Cn CO NENI GEc 1a 1b 2a 2b Tick the relevant box under Settings if you want inherited codes i e codes entered for a master data element of these lessons to be displayed in EET xj brackets One week v Show inherited codes Show total Font Cancel 97 98 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window Edit Master Data Less Cut Do The clipboard Paste Special o You can copy selected highlighted lessons to the clipboard e g First Element via Ctrl C Last Element Previous Element Nest Element Programme internal use The clipboard function allows you to copy the lessons of one class to another within the same programme Example You have finalized the subject distribution when you realize that due to the large number of new students your school will need a third first year class You find that you need to create a class 1c in addition to classes 1a and 1b Proceed as follows Teache Subjec Classes Subjec Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Coc Line value Linetext 2 Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn Create a new class 1c Open the lesson view for classes Lessons Classes and switch to the element 1a In the grid view select highlight all the lessons for 1a see
29. Combining selection criteria Logic L Grid Adjustment Z Quen RooCap Room Capacity 25 35 General Print L Grid Adjustment Fields Que TeDptSel Teacher Department D117 General Print g Field Active Column width Full Nam Sort Selection Description Query TeRM 2 8 xl x A Name 2 645 0 Name E E 2 Fullname 5 1500 FF 2 CH Print name Room NN 4 0 n 8 Room Test O 6 0 Fl B Test Description FE i FE E Description Marked m NF i 0 Fl B m Marked Lock x 8 0 n mg X Locked lanore i Fi iS 0 1 90 fil lanored The following facts are useful for working with the query function Fields The place holder supplies all the elements where the corresponding input field contains data Select empty fields by entering two commas Permitted logic links are NOT e g 1a gt LARGER THAN e g gt 10 gt LARGER THAN OR EQUAL TO e g gt 11 lt SMALLER THAN e g lt 20 and lt SMALLER THAN OR EQUAL TO e g 19 Numerical fields allow the input of number two sets of inverted ranges see following example You want to select every room with a capacity of 25 to 35 seats The result is displayed in Active Column Widtr Full Nam Sort Selection Description Descending Modified in ter T Codes OOOOORQOOOOOOOO00000 L o al L L L o L o0 L
30. Consider room capacity No optimisation of teach assign Aiste buildings by the half day No swap with other subjects For types C and D Swap only less with equal periods SU ncrease percentage by Swap only within one class level Ae aesign orginal teachers Optimisation process You have achoice of different strategies and optimisation depths Optimisation strategy A B C D gp Untis offers four different strategies for the construction of PRimssten Run your timetable These strategies offer different levels of 7 ues complexity Strategy A represents the lowest and Strategy D pemmeEETTEEITIT the highest level of complexity As a general rule the more Ez iscevenr repeated optim complex the optimisation strategy the better the result but P Esxcinensve x placement the longer it takes the software to compute the result The differences between the individual strategies are described in a later chapter Type of optimisation A B C D 127 128 gp Untis Standard Package Optmisation Number of constructed timetables OOOO O Cancel of periods to be scheduled blank 100 then STOP 4 Similarity to previous TT O not similar 4 very similar Lock timetable conditionally Only requested days off for tea Consider room capacity Gif site buildings by the half day For types C and D D Increase percentage by X
31. Cont Cont Cont mja maternal leave starts on 10 Nov C Cont d 5 Classes Cla Class 1a Gauss Class 1b Newton Class 2a Hugo Class 2b Andersen Class 3a Aristoteles Class 3b Callas Class 4 Mobel Time range Curie ad Teacher 18 3 2006 30 6 2007 13 Periods week Master data text 3 Unscheduled pers Af imetable comparison matemal leave starts on 10 T al mpdired timetable cription Contract Teacher 4 Des zl EU 2 Descriptions Des E DX x U XU x U 208 go Untis Standard Package Window Set Up Periods per week Displays the number of periods per week and the number of unscheduled periods per week for the active element Timetable window The middle part of the timetable window shows the actual timetable for the active element The display offers a variety of different settings and options that allow you to customise the display to suit your indivi dual requirements Please see a detailed description of these settings in the chapter User defined views on p 219 Clicking on a scheduled period on the timetable activates the period and causes the cell to be highlighted in pink All other periods connected with the active lesson are highlighted blue see example showing you at one glance how the periods of this lesson are distributed throughout the week Use the cursor keys or the P
32. For element gt 30 zi switch to the element 3b Class 3b Callas 30 0 Periods week Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn Open the lesson view for classes Lessons Classes and Enter the number 1 in the last empty row of the grid view under Per periods per week and confirm the selection by pressing Tab Enter or one of the cursor keys see example 5 Class 3b Callas L Cla 3b Classes Bn Division No L Statisti g b Subject Class es Minna Dus per Block EFT 1 Ander RE 1b 3b Rib i5 2 2 2 Callas AR 3a3b R3a 11 76 2 2 3 Arist mm 3b R3a 78 22 2 R3a 14 4 4 2 2 Sk Ps1 14 3 Gym Ps1 2 Ps1 2 Ps1 4 Ps1 2 Ps1 2 Ps1 1 BEEN Ps1 Ps1 Teache Subjer Class es Subjec Home Room Male Ps1 A new lesson has been added to the display Since you created the lesson using the active element 3b the software automatically entered 3b under Class es and Ps1 home room of class 3b under Home Room gt Enter the name New under Teacher and the subject EN under Subject The programme now has all the necessary information for this lesson The teacher Newton teaches English EN to class 3b for one period per week see example on the following page Lessons Window Ps1 The symbol t in the second column indicates that the English lessons for class 3b have not been scheduled yet Please see furt her details
33. For non numerical fields the row shows the number of data entries v Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn Example gt Close all open windows Ctrl K and open the lesson view for classes Lessons Classes Switch to class 1a gt Under Settings activate the option Show total You can see at one glance that the class 1a is scheduled to have a total of 30 periods per week and that 12 teacher fields and 4 room fields have been filled in coupled rows included in the count For purposes of clarity the tool bar in the example was moved to the left side of the window 3 Class 1a Gauss L Cla j 2 ni x Per TeacherSubject Class es Subject room Home Room Double per Block 30 00 12 12 12 4 11 2 i E F Hugo 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria Ander PER 1 PL Ria 14 O Arist PEG 1a1b SH2 e Arist D x Arist 1a Callas AR 1a Nobel H3 1a Rub DE 1a 2 a 5 5 2 Callas MU 1a 2 2 5 2 Cer GEc 1a 1b 2a 2b 88 gp Untis Standard Package Lesson Properties Input fields Data can be entered in either the grid view or the form view This chapter describes the different input options for the form view of the lesson window The input fields may vary slightly depending on the module you are using Class 1a Gauss L Cla Description For element la v Used to assign a description to a lesson same as with master data
34. L L Ll 0 in GGG GOGO OoOo o Name Print name Alterm room Text Description m Marked lt Locked N Do not print Statistical Code Department Room weighting Uif site Cotes aider Campa perv Corridor Break superv The element has been mot Time requests All codes OO H Query Roo A 8 Mame EE Class Room 2a R26 Rib Class Room b R2a Superv OOOOOSOOOOOOOOOO Master Data Views 39 descending order It is not possible to combine several conditions in one query field Print Printing ES Print Preview When a view or the query function is active i e when you have clicked on the view and the title bar is blue the functions Print and Print Preview will also be active Click on one of these buttons to open the Print Selection dialogue Print selection E E xj Teacher 3 a Detala Selection Oe Layout Page setup iTeacher x Type of list Heading FEES Gauss Data fields Ho Andersen Cancel Help Select the elements you want to print by clicking on lt Selection gt All Xj Department Select any teachers using the normal MS Windows selection Al Marked Inverse mechanisms Cancel As arule the fields activated in the grid view are printed in the order in which they appear in the grid EN Print Preview gt Load the file demo gpn gt Open the standard master data view for classes Master Data Classes
35. Lessons Teachers and switch to teacher Cer gt Click on the button New D New You have created a new lesson no 96 gt Finish by entering mandatory data under Per Subject and Class es EE BEEN For element Lessons Timetable Codes Values cet zi fi Periods week Alias name Subject Group Aap units week E peo Room shan a L b Subject Home Room Students F F esson number e ES Class es Les Groups p tatal zx e I Students Min Statistical Code Sliders May Lessons Timetable Codes Values Test 7 sisi tous fi Periods week Alias name Subject Group Line text Line text 2 Cer Teacher Room Students M EN Subject Home Room Students F o a Classes Les Groups Total Students Min Statistical Code E A RNE Text Student Course Line text 2 p Line text p 82 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window Coupling existing lessons P Use the previous example and enter a new lesson for teacher Curie 2 periods per week subject FR element must first be created class 1b LI as The aim is to couple the French lesson of teacher Curie with the English lesson Lessons Timetable Codes Values EZ porc Dm EET of teacher Cervantes TAM Vs wished INN iig een n FR suma RTD e a Students F 166 number aos D Tow Pp 3 mm EN Starts Min gt Activate the new lesson of teacher E Studer
36. Main subj day Consec Pers ilo Name arias P Formale students enter Male Room L Pi id Number of female students pan pupils Number of female st S t u d en t S un d er H ead In g 1 L O CL Number of male stu C Max main subject pe C and Male pupils under Max consec main _ Heading 2 SIIS ISTISTISTISTIS O Master Data Views P Click on OK and then on Print Preview The last two columns now contain the modified print headings TE Unts 2007 Timetable 20072008 Testschool DEMO 05 03 07 22 22 Valid from 10 October For demo and test only Class Female students Male students sane Full name Room Main subj day Consec Pers Female pupils Male pupils la Classta Gauss Rta 4 2 J 12 18 1b Class 1b cd Fh pe B 0L 22 2a Chss2a Hug R2a 4 e 12 14 2b Class2b Andersen Rab 2 dJ 418 di Fr te penssai cals ES E 1 M 8 amp d4 A Chss4 Nobe Ps2 54 J 12 N Gruber amp Petters Software Print with modified column headings Other special properties of the Master Data print function Some attributes of master data elements are elements in their own rights such as Room in the master data view of classes where you can enter the home room of a class Per default the software displays the abbreviated names of these attrib
37. Mon 1 to Mon 6 are coded 1 for O9ti scheduling not possible due to code 1 Tue 1 to Tue 3 scheduled for O9ti are coded 2 for 09A scheduling not possible due to code 2 35 09C 9C Timetable Cla20A Ed Doo ejus XS Ds o The timetables of core and differentiation classes can be displayed neatly and clearly using overview timetable format 20 Print the core and differentiation lessons of a class on a single timetable by accessing the master data field TT title Class Groups 277 Please note that gp Untis version 2006 and later allow you to assign several different master classes to a class The following example demonstrates the advantages of that option 5 Classes Cla DER KERDES O 3 895 Name Fulname Room Main subj day Consec Pers CI Grp No TTfile gt 4 3 ga 09A ROSA 098 ROB 4 3 Sb ogc ROSC 4 3 9c 09s ROSA 9a 9b 9c 08nb 9a 9b 9c Sa 9b 9c Sa 9b 9c 9a 9b 9c The differentiation lessons of class groups O9fs 09nb 09sw O9tc and O9ti are elective lessons for all students of core classes 09A 09B and 09C The three master class designations allow you to print complete timetables of all core classes including differentiation groups quickly and easily 2 8 gp Untis Standard Package Class Groups Alternative room ring Room logic The following chapter is devoted to the treatment of rooms Special attention will be placed on the difference between subj
38. Optimisation Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation periods Diagnosis CCC Analvsis Overall Diagnosis Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable h Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions modifying timetables In addition to the functions described in the chapter Scheduling periods on the timetable above the scheduling timetable offers additional functions for manually scheduling lesson gt Open the file demo gpn gt Open the scheduling timetable via the menu item Scheduling Scheduling Timetable The display shows the timetable of class 1a with additional information relevant for the scheduling process Y Scheduling Timetable 1b Arist MA 2H Callas DE 4 Hugo DE L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time 53 Rub DE Ria 1a The upper left hand part of the scheduling timetable displays the active class 1a All unscheduled lessons are listed on the Unscheduled tab Click on lesson 53 in the list As you can see two periods of lesson 53 remain to be scheduled The main timetable window contains a number of scheduled lesson periods together with additional information relating to the active lesson Subject German Class 1a Teacher Rub This is lesson 53 shown in the example Please see the following chapter for a detailed description of the ad ditional information shown on the timetable The Scheduling Timetable 155 Scheduling periods Denotes a period of the c v l s n the three a
39. Optimisation series Number of timetables 1 20 Use this option to specify how many different timetables you want the software to construct per series Each timetable is saved in a dedicated file workx gpn where x is the number of the file in the active gp Untis directory it is advisable however to enter a dedicated path for these work files on the Directories tab under Settings Miscellaneous Depending on the selected optimisation strategy see the chapter Strategies on p 132 the programme will carry out further optimisation runs for the timetables Optimisation level 1 9 This function allows you to specify the extent of the software s pre calculation function for each optimisation run Like a chess game programme the gp Untis programme calculates before each move i e before each placement of a lesson how the move will affect the situation as a whole Depending on the computer the size of the school and the figure entered for this option the optimisation of a timetable can take between a few seconds and a few minutes As a general rule the longer it takes the computer to arrive at a result the better the final outcome In the early stages of a timetable construction however long optimisation runs are often counter productive since initial results often indicate that certain changes need to be made to the input data Further input options can be found on the right hand side of the control data window of
40. Printing Page setu ea Page setup Use this option to specify the paper orientation portrait or landscape and the margins Please note that different printers require different minimum margin widths to be observed Paper Size A3 print Source It may often be useful to print overview timetables on A3 size paper If your printer supports printing on A3 paper proceed as follows Orientation Portrait 20 Right 10 10 Bottom 10 Set your printer to paper size A3 under File Print Restrict to page width rm Setup The timetable is automatically printed Hp OK Cancel Printer in A3 format C Landscape Print Setup Printer Name Dell Photo AID Printer 922 iv Status Ready Type Dell Photo Al Printer 322 Where USBOO1 Comment Faper Orientation Ls Printing 249 Background You can include images and graphs on your printed timetables The image must be available as a bitmap file Windows BMP format Depending on the bitmap you can use this function to print your school logo or a background for the timetable gt Open the Bitmap dialogue by clicking on Background under Print selection gt Select the type of bitmap file you want to include lt Browse gt The selected image will be shown in a preview pane on the right hand side of the dialogue box gt Use the Position fields to specify where the u
41. Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt Open the lesson view for teachers Lessons Teachers and select Gauss as the active element Home Room Ala Ala 100 gp Untis Standard Package Lesson Sequences gt Select highlight lesson numbers 7 to 5 in the grid view gt Copy the lessons to the clipboard e g via Ctrl C gt Switch to your spread sheet programme and paste the data Ctrl V EJ Microsoft Excel Bilvertsz iB File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help OF eb 5 x 21 e Boro T0 BIU Ez p s Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double pers Block 2 Ander DS 1a PL Ria 1 2Gauss DS 1b pE Ria 2 Curie TX 1a 1b CL 4 Gauss MA 3a R3a 2 Gauss GA 3a R3a 2 Curie TX 3a Gt 2 Gauss GA 3b Ps1 2 Curie TX 3b CL 2 Gauss GA 4 Ps2 SEEPAERE c a The following data will be copied to the spread sheet programme Theselected lessons Thefields shown in the view in the order in which they appear in the view Onerow per coupled teacher Lesson sequences Lesson sequences allow you to influence the scheduling of lessons on the timetable There are three different types of lesson sequences 1 Fixed subject sequences 2 Sequence in a week 3 Simultaneous lessons Lesson Sequences Fixed subject sequence Use the fixed subject sequence to specify the periods that must be scheduled in sequence You want the lesson Physi
42. Subject not possible only once a de Inp lnput Data Weighting 4 Cla Class Sub Subject Perwk Subj periods week L No Lesson number Cla Sub Perwk L No Ib MA 6 30 4 DE 6 21 Details Window into the sections shown in the left hand column Inp Input data Les Lesson Cla Class Tea Teacher Rm Room Sub Subject Stu Student Wtg Weighting The second column is entitled Wtg Weighting and shows the level of importance you assigned to the individual items in the weighting dialogue For example if the slider for Respect lunch break requests for classes is set to 5 extremely important the value 5 is displayed in the column Wtg for Lunch break too long and Lunch break too short An asterisk in this column means that the item is not weightable Num Number The third column entitled Num displays the number of violations of this particular item In some cases a second figure appears in brackets This figure refers to the number of periods For example the entry 10 24 under Les for item Missing teachers means that there are 10 lessons with a total of 24 periods per week where teachers are missing Diagnosis The fourth and last column entitled Diagnosis describes the actual item Please note that items with a weighting of 5 or marked for non weightable are highlighted with a different colour under Num to indicate that the timeta
43. The following figure shows a single teacher team Please note the blocked periods time requests 3 1 Teacher team Mame a m n m ja m p m a m p m a m p m a m p m a m p m M cusps tsp a E a a EE E I bL 1j Couplings Example Time Requests 269 2 0 gp Untis Standard Package Couplings Example This teacher team is scheduled for a lesson with three single periods per week Two of the three periods can be scheduled on Thursday and Friday but the third period can only be scheduled by violating the time request 3 of a teacher something gp Untis will never do or by violating the condition that the subject should take place no more than once a day depending on your weighting settings gp Untis may violate this rule please see the chapter Weighting on p 106 Class couplings The above rule for teacher teams also applies to class couplings i e lesson couplings across classes should if possible always involve the same classes Based on the example above class 1a in a two class coupling Head group A Head group B Group 4 Th should only be coupled with class 1b in a four class coupling only with classes 1b 1c and 1d Type seperated class components For organisational reasons one class sometimes consists of two type separated class components For example class 5a could consist of a Modern Languages and a Classics component While the former component
44. We therefore refer to these types of master data as elements All master data are managed in so called views Views are windows designed for the input of new master data and the maintenance i e modification of existing master data All master data views are essentially very similar in use and structure The following chapter describes the similarities between different master data views All Elements Master Data Lessons Sche Classes Teachers Rooms Subjects All Elements Element Rallup Departments Corridors Descriptions Alias Mames School Holidays Reduction reasons Display Master Data Note Note 11 12 gp Untis Standard Package All Elements Master Data Lessons Sche Classes Teachers Rooms Subjects Students Element Rollup A Term Overview Departments Corridors Descriptions Alias Names School Holidays Deduction grounds Reasons of absence Display Master Data Note The All Elements 35 Master Data Class Full name In this context another important window for managing elements should be introduced first The All Elements window The All Elements window enables you to manage all the different master data elements i e classes teachers rooms and subjects and students when using the Course Planning or the Student Timetable module in a single window Managing the window The following pages provide an overview of the window and its management
45. You want another teacher to replace Callas on Sat 5 Click on Replace teacher s gt A dialogue box will appear where you can make the desired changes The left half of the window displays the teacher s of the active lesson The right half displays all the teachers available based on their own timetables to take on ALL the periods of the active lesson Repl teacher s Example 186 op Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue The following additional details are provided to facilitate the decision making process gt Per Wk Number of periods per week taught by the teacher gt UnSc Number of those periods that remain to be scheduled gt Subject Teacher already teaches this subject Tea qual Teacher is qualified to teach this subject The example shows that both Gauss and New are qualified to take on the lesson Scheduling Dialogue Callas Callas Maria X 17 3 2007 5 E Periads 1 28 6 2008 CH All unsched periods Teacher Subject L No Tea Subj Rm Cla 4 rene FL D34 Ja Ih Ja Ih 4 Callas Callas Maria Cont Contract Teacher Click on teacher New and check if the lesson would fit into the teacher s timetable Assign the lesson to the teacher by clicking on Assign tea The Scheduling Dialogue 187 Display functions The functions described below can be used to change the scheduling dialog
46. at least once before or in period 5 T h e ve R ooms ve ta b Teachers Teachers Classes Subjects Main Subjects Rooms Period Distribution Time Requests Analysis Unimportant Extremely important Optimisation of room allocation Optimisation of room allocation Optimisation of the off site rooms Use the Hoom weight field under ease Take room capacity into consideration Master Data Rooms to assign a value between 0 and 4 to each room in the school O indicates that the room is non essential for the lesson allocated to it i e it is unimportant if Rooms Tab a lesson takes place in this room or in an alternative room for instance because the lesson requires no special fixed teaching aids 4 indicates a high priority i e a lesson should be scheduled in this room or its designated alternative room if at all possible A Chemistry lesson where a number of experiments will be performed should only take place in the Chemistry lab A PE lesson only makes sense when the sports hall is available You have entered both a home room and a subject room fora Example particular lesson The optimisation tool will always allocate the subject room since the allocation of home rooms is the sole responsibility of the subsequent room optimisation function Please see the chapter Room logic on p 278 for further details If the weighting slider is set to 5 extremely important or 4 very Note important and if in addi
47. in the grid view or the form view by using Drag amp Drop Class 2b Andersen Class 3a Aristotelez Master Data Views R2b Raa fF fF fF You want to move the element HE1 in the demo file to a new Example position above SH1 v Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn v Open the master data view for rooms gt Click on the row of element HE1 in the grid view P Click onthe row marker in the first column of the row drag the row to the desired position and release it Marked m Z Rooms Roo Class Room 2a Class Room 2b Class Room 3a ame R2a R2b R3a Ria Pseudo Room 1 3b Ria Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a 4 4 3 3 4 4 2 2 Z 2 2 z 2 l3 bi bi Mi 43 44 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views Deleting elements X Delete Delete master data elements by clicking on Delete in the tool bar of the view Alternatively you can click on the element you want to delete in the grid view and press Ctrl X I Changing element names Class Timetable Values Change the name of an element by doub ues 7 T a le clicking on the name in the grid view A dialogue window appears where you can rename the element Room Class Room 1a Class Room 1b 4 Class Room 2a 4 Class Room 2b 4 Class Room 3a 4 Pseudo Room 1 3b 4 Paeurdo Ronm are 4 E Name Click Class 4 Nobel Fullname ick Click m 4 s Alternatively
48. indicates that the timetable for this class or teacher is already very good i e has relatively few penalty points In relation to Ie 1992008 30 82007 E the other periods the displayed period may be one of the three worst placed ones Overall however it is sen Tues Wed Thur Frida GEc MU MA fairly well placed It is unnecessary therefore to F 1 EN MA change the period manually 2 MU EN PEG DE RE In short the diagnosis function provides an overview 3 BI MA EN EN of all timetables while the overall diagnosis function 4 ji a cg targets the worst timetables in the school and aims s DE to improve them The overall diagnosis window also wa displays the causes of violations ER 7 Use the scheduling dialogue to finalize the timetable 8 js i E manually Ignore the room allocation function until Tea Subj Rm Cla Time after the room optimisation ONE EEE 2 146 gp Untis Standard Package Manual Timetabling Example Manual Timetabling gp Untis offers three different manual timetabling options in the timetable in the scheduling timetable or in the scheduling dialogue All three options offer tools for the most important scheduling activities such as placing moving swapping locking and deleting periods as well as allocating rooms manually More
49. item Master Data Display Master Data gt Tickthe box In menu in the corresponding column for TeDpt You can now access the view directly from the Master Data menu Teachers department wise Class Teacher Subject Room Class A Teacher Subject A Teachers departme Teacher B bject B Room B Corridor Lesson T able Syllat Groups Department Students Description Class Teacher Subject Room Lesson T able Name Full name Standard In menu HETETETETET IO SOS SO KI EI LI LIE ISI IST ISTIS ST IST E ET COE Class Teacher Subject Room Class Teacher Subject Room Teacher Subject Room Corridor Lessons tat Group Departmen Students Description Class Teacher Subject Room Lessons tat IOUOUOUUUOO OG BE il xt TeDpt Help Teachers department wise Name Full name Standard In menu Type Query Cla Class O Class C Tea Teacher Teacher Sub Subject v Subject Roo Room v O Room Cla amp Class A a Class a Tea Teac
50. les lesson on Tuesday periods 7 and 8 Lessons Periods 5 n c Open the file demo gpn and the scheduling sar eee 30 6 2008 2b Callas DE Y SURE timetable Scheduling Scheduling Timetable 4 Hugo DE Allocate Delete this room xi Allocate the room to Delete room Allocate rm Close s single period Lessons 7 Tu 7 Also show occupied rooms Available rooms PL PL Gauss GE BL Curie PL E lab e AS i a ee GIL DS PL Voluntary Exercise DS PL z Curie DOCD 1a 1b alglgiaim p e e OOOO KI I KS O Place the cursor on Tue 7 and click on Allocate Delete Room Alternatively open the window by using the shortcut Ctrl HR The left window of the dialogue box contains a list of all the rooms involved in this lesson Planned The desired designated room for the lesson Actual The scheduled room Te The teacher assigned to teach the lesson 161 162 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Timetable Allocate Delete this room Allocate the roam ta te period block Lessons P Tu 7 Tu 8 Flanned Actual Tea PL CL HE1 B R1a Gauss HE1 Curie Econ room Delete room Allocate rm Close Also show occupied rooms Available rooms Rm room by double clicking on the Select from the drop down menu Assign the room to for which period you want to change the room allocation a
51. oe 00 oo Name Fullname Room Text Mainsubj day Consec Pers Lunch break Stat Codes Codes ia Class 1a Gauss Ala 2 1b Class 1b Newton Rib 2 5 2a Class2a Hugo R2a 4 2 12 Z 2b Class 2b Andersen R2b 4 2 12 Z 3a Class 3a Aristoteles R3a 4 2 12 Z 3b Class 3b Callas Ps1 4 2 12 Z 4 Class 4 Nobel Ps2 4 2 13 Z bd WI Deleting elements Delete To delete an existing element click on the corresponding row and element then on Delete Resizing the window 5 Resize the This function enables you to adjust the window frame to the size of window the data grid see figure on following page ick Zf Master Data Roomy k nj x DIX c amp te EJ Cass Teacher Vi od TName Full name Altern roo SS Master Data Room loj x B SHI Sports Hall 1 SH2 hs Defauitlight SH2 Sports Hall 2 SHI O c LT Ey BR ipefautigt v a Eram si j 4 Semin lab Full name Alter room Text E HET Home Econ room Spore Hal EE R2b Class Room 2b R3a spote E 3 R3a Class Room 3a Ria zs VON 3 Rib ClassRoomib R2a puer a R2a Class Room 2a R2b ed d i Sd recess ome Econ room eee Closs Room Ta__ Alb P Class Room2b R3 amp 2 Ps Pseudo Room 1 3b Ala Ps2 Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a Class Room 3a Ria 2 zi Class Room 1b R2a 2 Class Room 2a R2b 2 Class Room 1a Rib 2 Pseudo Room 1 3b R1a 2
52. or something is wrong with your settings In the example the easiest solution would be to schedule at least one double period for the subject by entering 1 1 in the field Double periods Min Max on the Timetable tab in the lesson window We would strongly advise you to act on the messages displayed by the data analysis tool since the identified problems could seriously reduce the effectiveness of the optimisation tool For instance in the example above the violation of the single period condition would lead to a decrease in timetable quality penalty points Optimisation Optimisation Control data for optimisation The optimisation dialogue is accessible via the menu item Lair Timetable Rep Scheduling Optimisation The following chapter describes the gaa individual input fields in this window Oplimised Timetables Room Optimisation Diagnosis CCC Analysis Overall Diagnosis Control Data for Optimisation XI Optimisation Run Cancel 25 of periods to be scheduled blank2100 then STOP Type of optimisation A B C D Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable 4 Calculate a series of n timetables 3 Optimisation series Mao of TT s 1 20 4 Similarity ta previous TT nat similar 4 yery similar as Break Supervisions 2 Optimisation level 1 3 Lock timetable conditionally Only requested days off for tea Teacher assignment during optimization
53. pr 17 9 2007 30 6 2008 Empty green cells denote 4 s Petiods weck zl slots on the timetable where a lesson may be scheduled without risk of conflict L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Cluster scheduling Periods on the Timetable Cells highlighted purple indicate that the room allocated to the lesson is not available gt Open the file demo gpn and the class timetable of class 4 gt Drag away the German period on Thursday period 5 hold down the left mouse button Purple cells indicate that the room allocated to the lesson or one of its alternative rooms is not available Instead the lesson can be moved to Thu 4 and Mon 5 without creating a conflict with another class or teacher The lesson could also be moved to purple slots Thu 2 or Wed 4 As these are already occupied however the move would necessitate a lesson swap gt Drop the period on a purple cell This means that the lesson will be scheduled without an allocated room The room allocation for the lesson originally placed in this slot does not change The example shows that you still need to find a room for the German lesson on Thursday period 4 Move double periods and lesson blocks in the same way as you would move single periods However if you only want to move one period of a lesson block or a double period press the Ctrl key Room conflict 2 Huso CE CENE 151 152 gp Untis Standard Package
54. 00 as the time the first afternoon lesson should start The software will treat the time between 12 00 and 13 00 as a lunch break not as a period gt Specify element specific lunch break blocks time request 3 gt Include the lunch break in the timetable construction This last lunch break scheduling option allows for a better use of subject rooms The option enables you to specify different lunch break durations for individual teachers and classes Enter 1 2 in the box Lunch break Min Max to instruct the software to schedule either 1 or 2 lunch break periods for the selected element Based on the weighting the lunch break will be scheduled during Lunch Breaks Colour 265 266 gp Untis Standard Package Lunch Breaks the last morning periods and or the first afternoon periods On a timetable with 5 morning periods and 4 afternoon periods a two period lunch break will be scheduled either for periods 4 and 5 periods 5 and 6 or periods 6 and 7 Vary the time during which a lunch break can be scheduled by specifying the first and the last period when a lunch break may be scheduled on the Breaks tab in the time grid The boundary between morning and afternoon lessons must lie within the specified time interval see the figure below If your school cafeteria has a limited capacity f Time Grid mix use the same tab to enter the maximum General Breaks Substitute number of classes that can have
55. 4 Callas New New i3 2 4 3 5 1 1 4 2 34 New 6 90 New 95 New 61 Cer 6 62 Cer 6 Cer 6 90 New 95 New 94 38 Callas 41 Callas 6 13 Hugo 6 17 Hugo 20 Hugo 90 New 95 New B B 2 Callas 121 122 gp Untis Standard Package Analysis of Input Data Per Classes Teachers The CCC details window 2 3 2 4 3 5 1 1 4 2 2b 2b 3a New New New New Curie New New 3b 4 Callas New New The bottom part of the window the details window displays the details of the lesson selected in the middle part of the window The example shows that the cells for lesson numbers and the number of periods per week are now shaded light blue Several other cells are now shaded red The details window now displays the following information the elements involved in lesson 8 with a total of 2 periods per week are the class 2b and the teacher Newton abbreviated name New Lesson 6 with one period per week by contrast involves several classes 2a 2b 3a 3b and 4 and teacher Callas Some lessons such as lesson 74 3 periods per week may only involve one class here class 4 but several teachers Curie and Newton The cells shaded red highlight the reason why the displayed lesson cannot be scheduled at the same time as the lesson selected in the middle part of the window Lesson 6 for instance cannot be scheduled at the same time as lesson 8 since both lesso
56. 4 Max consec periods half day Lunch break B Daily Fr Break Max periods day C Teacher Optimisation Code Max consec prds D Home room Use this field to assign a dedicated home room to a teacher Lunch break Min Max Enter the minimum and maximum duration of lunch breaks for indi vidual teachers Periods day Min Max The data in this field determines the minimum and maximum number of periods a teacher should teach each day Enter 2 5 for a teacher who should teach between 2 and 5 periods per day Leaving this field empty allows gp Untis to schedule any number of periods for a teacher NTPs Min Max Use this field to specify the minimum and maximum number of NTP s frees non contact periods per week for an individual teacher An empty field is equivalent to the entry 0 0 Max consec Periods half day This field allows you to specify the maximum number of consecutive periods a teacher should teach before a NTP break is scheduled Daily Fr Break In schools where lessons continue until evening it is often desirable to specify the length of time between the last period in the evening and the first period in the morning to allow students and teachers a sufficiently long break between classes The time grid of a school shows a total of 11 periods per day On Monday teacher X teaches until period 9 A value of 4 entered under Daily Fr Break means that gp Untis will attempt to schedule
57. All gt Drag room R1ato the All Elements window and drop it in row 1a under Room Room R1a is now the designated home room for class 1a The Customise tab under Settings Miscellaneous offers two Note options for the management of the element roll up Activate double click Ticking this option allows you to enter an element from the element rollup in the active cell of the window you are working on by double clicking on the element Update elements Ticking this option allows you to activate an element in other open windows by clicking on the name of the element in the element roll up Miscellaneous Settings HTML E Mail Auto save Directories Timetable Multiple Terms Customise Value Calculation Import Export Menu C All menu items Sub menus per country Menus for the country Elements x Autolnfo Warnings Data Entry v Auto complete Drop down menus for master data C Mouse click activates edit mode If Show the field description m Lesson windows IV Element field above less nr Refresh the classes student no s V Dynamic details window Auto size for the details window lanore room and text when combingin coupling lines nore upper lower case when Sing Element Rollup IV Activate double click v Update elements gt First delete the entry R1a under Room for class 1a select the appr
58. All the classrooms are now marked Marked m gt Remove the tick in the Query box in the grid adjustment ER Lox dialogue and click on OK ex aller The screen now displays all the rooms in your school again see is figure on the right 1 ri Oo Chemist yl ab O Home Econ room O Sorti ng Class Room 1a The Sort function sorts the elements of the view by active field mass Raon Th content While the function is active the sorted column is Class Room 2b highlighted with a red frame Activate the Sort function a second o am time to restore the original order Me Pseudo Room O O A If you click on a different master data or lesson window while the zl Sort Sort function is active you will be asked if you want to retain the new order Click on Yes if you want the programme to move the data internally and apply the new sorting order to other windows and functions EU Classes Cla Class 3b Callas Ps Class 4 Mabel Ps2 Class 2a Hugo R2a Class 1a Gauss Ria Class 3a LAristoteles Rida Class 1b Newton Rib Clase 2b Andersen Rah 50 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views Note Show fields E with content HL DE SN i Gee MA G B PH MJ Tx AR ins ME Jos O PR _ PEG s Lock view Example Click The different sorting options available in gp Untis are described in detail in the chapter Sorting elements under Master data views above
59. B Lock conditionally Lessons marked B are treated as locked lessons during the first part of the optimisation run placement run During the subsequent optimisation run swap run however the temporary locking function is automatically deactivated see also the chapter Optimisation on p 127 D Respect double periods Activate this function for a lesson or a subject if you want the optimisation tool to adhere strictly to the number of permitted desired double periods This also applies to lessons for which double periods are generally not permitted 0 0 in the Double periods Min Max field The function is particularly useful when the optimisation errors Double per split up Unrequ double pers and Subject twice a day should be avoided at all cost Usethis function sparingly if in doubt not at all since it causes Lesson Properties major restrictions for the optimisation tool especially for Waming subjects with many periods per week When using this function ensure that the relevant weighting parameter Avoid errors with double periods is increased to 5 if necessary Please also note that to ensure the correct treatment of double periods data must be entered in the Double periods Min Max field gt The code D excludes the use of code 2 and C C No single periods Lessons marked C are preferentially scheduled as block lessons Single periods will be avoided if at al
60. Class 1a Gauss Timetable Cla1 Sel EI E o uw 2 fa oH la 1m Time range Classes v 17 9 2007 28 6 2008 26 Periods week 5 Unscheduled pers C Timetable comparison Basic Level Only modified timetables El lu I Tuesday Wednes Thursda Friday lili L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Specialtext Cluster Arist EN Rla 1a ui 222 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views Settings Coupled lessons If you also want to display the details of lesson couplings proceed as follows Openthe file demo gonandthe timetable Class usi ses se schedule big Timetable Class schedule eae big Open the timetable period editing window Timetable Settings Period window Per default the large class timetable displays four fields one each for subject teacher room and the Footnote reference 1Sub 1Tea 1Roo 9993 Classes Rooms Subjects Students 4 List All Views Class schedule big Te schedule big Room schedule big Overview classes Overview rooms Overview teachers Footnote reference Itis not always possible to display all the details of a coupled lesson with many elements in the timetable period since this would take up too much space on the screen and the printout see for example lesson 11 on Wednesday period 1 of class 1a Instead the details can be displayed in a legend in a footnote see also
61. Drag the second lesson of class 1a amp lesson 7 onto the timetable Since the settings specify a double period the lesson is automatically scheduled as a double period Room availabilty Lesson cells highlighted purple see example on the following page indicate that the allocated room i e the designated room or one of its alternative rooms is not available Scheduling Periods on the Timetable 149 e Boys PE L Sub Locking periods Lock a period in place by clicking on Lock period in the tool bar e of the timetable This will prevent the automated scheduling tool Lock period from moving the period during a subsequent optimisation run Alternatively lock the selected period by pressing F7 The same key can be used to unlock a period Locked periods are marked with an asterisk in the period details window next to the lesson number The asterisk can also be displayed in the timetable period Layout 2 tab under Ej 3 e 48 Bal 22 e Timetable Settings Class 1a Gauss Timetable Clai Classes J mU 30 6 2008 28 Periodf week RIS Ei 2 Layout 01 Individual timetable with days across the top General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML r Period window Changed Periods Double periods like single periods v Red Comb class names a 2r 2ab Bold Italic IV Label locked sided with a mark Emphasised by
62. Hugo could not teach French to the same class at the same time and Newton could not teach English to class 1a at the same time Analysis of Input Data Example 119 120 gp Untis Standard Package Analysis of Input Data Mutual obstruction of coupled teachers Scheduling Timetable Rep Weighting Optimisation Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation Diagnosis Overall Diagnosis Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions g CCC Critical Conflict C Hugo Newton English 1a Hugo Newton French Physics 2a du 2a The total number of periods per week involved in a chain is a measure of how difficult it is for the software to schedule the lessons in the chain It is easy to see for instance that a large number of different teacher teams will mean a rapid increase in the total number of periods in the chain If this number is greater than the number of periods available in the time grid it is mathematically impossible to schedule all the lessons in this chain The task of the CCC analysis is to locate the longest conflict chains Start the analysis by accessing the menu item Scheduling CCC Analysis The CCC window appears and the CCC analysis starts automatically The analysis can take up to several minutes depending on the size of your school During the analysis you will see the number of the lesson currently being analyzed i e scanned
63. Input data format for import Export of formats gpf Window groups import Export file C terp New GPF Browse v Timetable formats Select Entry formats Select window groups Select Export _ uo Close the current work file In order to make these views available for use in other files you need to import or export them IL LICL gt Open the file demo gonand create a new timetable view as described on p 19 gt Select File Import Export Timetable Input formats Select the Export of formats gpf tab from the dialogue box P Enter a name in the name field of the export file e g New gpf You can export the format details of timetable views and of master data views Select a particular timetable view for export by clicking on Select in the row Timetable formats P From the dialogue box select the timetable view whose format you want to export and click on OK Timetable formats iz AXI Short name Full name Type Element TT Clase J New View Cla Class 1 Teacher Diagnose Teacher Teacher 1 Teacher Please select the desired Formats Room 1 Room Students Student Class 1 Class Teacher 1 Teacher Roam 1 Room ga m aN E to ha a Activate the Export button in the Import export format window The format data has been saved in the file New gpf You can now make your formats av
64. Open the standard master data view for rooms Master Data Rooms The view on your screen should correspond approximately to the view in the figure below Z Rooms Roo o x x U A hy END x e Air an 8s alist 12 0 Room Marked m Change SH2 Altern room Lock X 4 Rim Weight Don t Print N Time Requests Oste codes Form view Sports Hall 1 Full name Room capacity Text Dept Description Corridor Break Statistical Code y Ra Full name Sports Hall 1 Gymnasii Physics lab Grid view Home Econ room Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room 2a Class Room 2b Class Room 3a Pseudo Room 1 3b Pseudo Room 2 4 4 4 3 3 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Window structure The window consists of three basic components the tool bar the form view and the grid view The functions of the tool bar will be discussed in detail in a later chapter Form view The form view is dedicated to one element and its attributes In the example above the form view displays the name of the selected room the often more informative full name of the room the room capacity etc Grid view In contrast to the form view the grid view is organized as a table with individual rows Each row represents one element The grid view displays all the attributes activated in the corresponding view by the user The activated attributes in the example above are name full name alternative room tex
65. Scheduling Periods on the Timetable Save block Lessons 33 Th 3 gt Fr 3 Other lessons causing a clash Humber of clashing lessons 1 Save with class clash Save with teacher clash Save with room clash Periad swap Save block EC TN Possible partner Lessons b 13 prior to selecting the period you want to schedule This means ri that the periods are displayed as 792007 306 2008 single periods and can be moved individually see example Swapping periods Periods highlighted green green cells occupied by a period can be swapped with other periods highlighted green Drop Xl a period on a green cell and a window will appear where you can specify if you want to swap the period or if you want to create a conflict Scheduling periods with clashes Moving a period to a non highlighted cell is not possible without creating a clash The lesson details window displays the lesson number and details of the lesson in conflict with the moved period If you decide to drop the period in such a cell a window will appear showing the following two options P Cancel cancels the move P Save block saves the xil moved active lesson in the Lessons 31 cell where you droppeditand 5Th de schedules the lesson Numba d cashing lessons 2 originally scheduled in that Save with class clash Slot Save with teacher clash Save with room clash Use the combo bo
66. Subject room 5aM i Ps1 Gauss Mew Huge Ander Arist Callas Mabel Curie Curie 3i Class 5aM Modern Languages L Cla Class es Subject room Home Room SaM Ps1 R5a SaM 5aC R5a Sam Sac R5a Sam 5ac R5a Home Room Male Female Line R5a ag Lintis 2007 Timetable 200772008 Test school DEMO 11 Valid torm 10 October For demaandtest only C a1 5a 5a NENNEN NM 5a Chi MA Gau R5 Sachi GE Goe RS Sachi M Gau R5 Sach MILI Cal SaChi MA Gau R5 aCh GE Goe RS 5aChM MA Gau R5 5aCM MU Cal R5 faChd GE Goe R5 SaChd GE Goe R5 SaChi GE Goe 5a Chi h Gar 2 2 gp Untis Standard Package Class Groups Core and differentiation lessons Example Class groups Per default setting the gp Untis standard software package optimizes school timetables for schools based on class structure i e where each student is assigned to one particular class and the lessons scheduled for the student are determined completely by his or her class Another type of system involves free course choice where students can choose elective subjects within certain limits and classes and year groups no longer exist This type of school system allows students to choose his or her own courses which means it is no longer the class that is the focal point of the timetabling efforts but the student This timetabling situation can be managed with the aid of the gp Untis Course Scheduling module Some school systems such
67. Untis 2008 3 Gruber amp Petters Gruber amp PettersSoftware Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Mathematics 54 s classroom SA s classroom 5A Mathematics SA s classroom Substitution 5A s classroom 6 5 3 English CDT 5A s classroom Junior CDT room 5A English S 5A 5A s classroom 4 Geography ICT SA s classroom SA s classroom 6 English 5A SA s classroom History 54 s classroom 5A English SA s classroom 6 SA English Mathematics SA s classroom SA s classroom SA Mathematics 54 s classroom 5A 6 English English SA s classroom SA s classroom SA SA Geography Mathematics 5A s classroom SA s classroom 6H SA Drama English m SA s classroom Shifted from 6th per 6 English SA s classroom gp Untis 2008 Gruber amp Petters Gruber amp PettersSoftware gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 Untis UK 24 07 07 11 58 1l Wednesday Thursday Friday Art ICT Fossey 3 History Compton 8 Music Richards gt When using the Cover Planning module the updated timetables also contain complete details on teaching cover 299 254 gp Untis Standard Package Import and Export of Views 8 Display Timetables a Import and export of views ae Rae As arule the views you create are saved in Class schedule big Class 1 Class 1 Class 10 OOOUOO OS Import export format x Import timetable layout
68. V to allow the software to replace teachers involved in these lessons with other suitable teachers Please see the chapter Optimisation under Timetable optimisation on p 130 before using this function Lesson Properties L Not in legend Lessons marked L are not included in the legend of the printed timetable U p m only double periods This code ensures that the automated optimisation function will only schedule double periods and no single periods in the afternoon This code is only useful when Note double periods are permitted and the subject is marked as a subject that can take place in the afternoon M Schedule manually Lessons marked M are ignored by the optimisation tool These lessons need to be scheduled manually e g with the help of the scheduling dialogue Show codes ESen g Class 1a Gauss L Cla This field can only be activated in the grid view via the button Grid Adjustment Itoffers an BIF excellent overview of the rele E vant timetable settings of a lesson The code column clearly and comprehensively displays all the codes placed for a lesson The code Z denotes lessons with an active time request bein pani Lessons Timetable Codes Values 11 r IV Locked B Lock conditione lt gt Teacher Subject Class es Subject roo Home Room Double per Block T Hugo az 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria 141 Ander R1a 141 Arist Ria Arist Ria Arist Callas
69. a bothersome but necessary task 136 gp Untis Standard Package Diagnostic Tools Note Example The diagnosis tool is designed to facilitate this task This chapter not only deals with errors but also with so called input weaknesses Input weaknesses are data that while not technically wrong can cause inferior or unexpected results Percentage planning After finishing your data entry you should initially carry out a percentage planning run e g at 30 to identify lessons that the gp Untis software categorizes as difficult As a rule the programme attempts to place such lessons as quickly as possible to prevent them from causing an obstruction later during the process The difficulty of alesson is determined by the number of unavailable lesson elements the number of element couplings and the size of the lesson block Warning Specifying a planning priority for lessons on the Timetable tab has a profound effect on this aspect of the optimisation process Do not use this option lightly and use it only when you have good reason to do so If gp Untis encounters problems during the scheduling of the very first 3096 of periods and if this very first optimisation run is unable to schedule certain periods the first thing to do is to increase the number of timetables to be constructed and the number of optimisation steps If the tool is still unable to schedule the periods you can assume that the input data contain in
70. a customized date range or the total school year depending on the date range entered under Selection range under Timetable Settings Term Allows you to include the full or abbreviated name of a term in the heading of printed timetables for use with the Multiple Terms Timetable module Fixed constant text Text entered here e g elective subject timetable is displayed on all timetables of this format Layout Timetable Modify the print layout via the Layout 1 and Layout 2 tabs under Settings Timetable Settings Layout of fields 5 Layout 01 Individual timetable with days across the top i Io x General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML Select the 3D layout option for Headings Design layout of fields Scheduled periods and Free periods via Heading Scheduled periods Free periods the option SD layout see example on 3D layout D launut 3D layout C Embossed nbossed the left C Flat Flat C Gey New ey C Whit hite Printing 241 Print black amp white Select this option if the timetables on your screen are colour coded but you want the timetables to be printed in black amp white for instance because your printer does not support colour printing Do not print empty rows Empty rows will not be printed This option allows for considerable savings in paper and space especially for overview timetables and timetables in HTML f
71. a total of 4 free periods for teacher X between Monday and Tuesday No lessons will therefore be scheduled for teacher X on Tuesday periods 1 and 2 L Lunch break z NTP The lunch break can be regarded as a NTP When this option is active the optimisation function treats the lunch break as an undesirable NTP effectively cancelling the lunch break H Sched a m p m not both This function ensures that lessons can only be scheduled for one half day of the day i e gp Untis can allocate lessons either in the morning OR in the afternoon of the same day Y Keep curr loading pattern Activate this option if you want to block the allocation of a teacher before the first and after the last periods already scheduled for the half day This means that a subsequent optimisation run ignores the teacher for the periods out of the given range Please see the example in the chapter Master data properties Classes on p 61 The input block Very important allows you to specify different timetabling priorities for each individual teacher No NTP s A Activate this option to instruct the software to avoid scheduling NTP s for the teacher Lunch break B Tick this box if you want gp Untis to pay particular attention to lunch break compliance when constructing the timetable Master Data Properties Example Very important 65 66 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties Max periods day C Activating this o
72. advanced functions and additional information are available with the last two options using the scheduling timetable or the scheduling dialogue Scheduling periods in the timetable The easiest method of scheduling periods manually manual timetabling using the timetable relies on familiar windows and functions The following tasks can be carried out manually on a normal class or teacher timetable scheduling periods locking periods swapping periods deleting periods and V Ww Ww ww allocating rooms Scheduling periods The aim of this exercise is to place periods in an empty timetable and lock them to prevent the automated scheduling tool from moving them during a later optimisation run Open the file demo gpn and close all open windows shortcut keys Ctrl K O Delete the current timetable via Scheduling Delete the Timetable Open a class timetable and a class lesson view Scheduling Periods on the Timetable 147 The symbol in the column Cl Te marks all lessons with d Unscheduled unscheduled periods Periods Change the settings under Timetable Settings to Total school year or Whole term if using the module Multiple Term Timetable a required setting that enables the manual Drag amp Drop function If the range of your timetable is set for a calendar week a message will appear asking you to change the setting 5 Timetable i Settings 5 Layout 01 Individual
73. also allow period swaps across classes Consecutive swaps Carry out consecutive swaps in either the scheduling dialogue or in the scheduling timetable using Drag amp Drop This is similar to working with a peg board You schedule a lesson by displacing another lesson activate the lesson you have displaced and schedule it in a different slot activate the next lesson you have displaced if any and schedule it in yet a different slot etc Load the file demo gpn and open the scheduling dialogue and a class timetable You want to move the PE lesson no 73 of class 1a on Fri 8 to a better earlier slot on the timetable O Try dragging the lesson to a different position on the timetable You will see that the only available slots are the lunch break on Tuesday and period 5 on Saturday Neither are ideal options 3 1a Class 1a Gauss Timetable Cla L No Tea Subj Rm Rub PEB SH1 2b 2a Arist PEG SH2 2b 2a Time range 194 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Drag the lesson in the scheduling dialogue away from its slot on Fri 8 and simultaneously hold down the Ctrl key Arist PEG SH2 1a 1b Rub PEB SH1 1a 1b The software displays the symbol gt on all slots where the lesson would be blocked by only a single element For instance if both the class and the teacher of the lesson to be scheduled in this slot are already involv
74. asingle period b the period block C all periods of a lesson You wantto change the room allocation for the double period shown in the example above Select the period block The right half of the win ow spla the list available rooms Rm The abbreviated name of the room Cap The room capacity if entered under master data Alt Rm Theroomis an alternative room for the designated lesson room Alt HRm The room is an alternative room for the home room of the class In the example see previous page the rooms R1a to R3a are marked Alternative to the home room since the rooms are part of the alternative room chain for room R1a home room of class 1a and for room R1b home room of class 1b Select a room e g R1a and click on Allocate room The lesson will now take place in R1a instead of the physics lab XI Click on the second row in the left part of the window and replace the room CL with another e g HE1 Alternatively allocate the new room LI LIE OOO oo Lj The period details window of the scheduling timetable now displays the newly allocated rooms for periods 7 and 8 The previously allocated rooms for the lessons are shown in brackets Click on Delete room if you want to delete an already allocated room Undo Ander DS R1a PL 163 he Scheduling Timetable Cla Time Stud Special text Clusi 1a Voluntary Exercise Gauss
75. at the periods per week In the longest chain first an a z TT Non row in the middle part of the window the lesson with the most 8 2 2b New periods per week is lesson 93 with teacher Newton 5 periods Tp i Cus NR per week Replacing Newton with another teacher could result x nm in the shortening of this chain by 5 periods per week Since the eae 7 couplings all affect each other however the chain could be 5 2 2 New shortened by less than that Lesson 93 is Math and another suitable teacher would be Aristotle In lesson 93 replace teacher Newton New with Aristotle Arist Carry outa new CCC analysis Now the longest chain is the one with 24 periods previously the second longest The previously longest chain now only contains 22 periods Lesson 93 is no longer a part of this chain Per Lessons 29 75 Anst 3O Arist 93 Arist 11 73 Arist 31 Arist 33 Arist 24 75 Arist 76 Arist 73 31 Arist 33 nst 53 Rub 23 B 59 Cer 60 re 65 n 66 Cer 62 Cer 67 Cer 68 Cer 61 Cer 86 Cer 23 30 Arist 11 31 Arist 33 Arist Saeed Oe Danen Nae Noe T Dr a 21 34 38 Callas 41 Calas 34 Callas 37 Callas 42 Callas 11 21 75 omm 76 m 30 iem 54 Rub 73 21 B 18 Hugo 15 Hugo 15 Hugo 13 Hugo 1 Hugo 20 Hugo 21 Hugo S5 Hugo 11 Hugo 1 B 43 76 79 S New 10 New 92 New When the CCC analysis identifies many CCCs with lessons with a large number of periods
76. click on Change in the form view of the element you want to modify NN NN NN PF eo co Scrolling in the form view 4 There are several methods for switching between elements in the Bo form view Either click on the spin controls located beside the Name A field or place the cursor directly on the Name field and use the Page Up and Page Down keys or the cursor keys to scroll up Spin Controls or down Another method for displaying a specific element is to enter the name of the element in the white input field Master Data Views 45 Data exchange via the clipboard Use the clipboard to export master data to external programmes such as spread sheet or word processing programmes gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gm gt Open the standard master data view for teachers Mas ter Data Teachers New 26 000 Value Marked m Change gt Select teachers Newton to Curie by highlighting the F ise names P Copy the teacher master data to the clipboard e g by pressing Ctrl C gt Open your word processing programme and use the lt Pas te function or Ctrl V to insert the data You should now have copied the selected teacher master data to your word processing programme p Microsoft Word Bz Times NewRoman oy d cdd Y 45 Calls Callas 46 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views Resize El Window You should ha
77. conflict symbols A B and C are not scheduled at the same time Timetable comparison It is often useful and necessary to compare timetables with each other for instance when you implement manual changes or when you want to compare different versions of your timetable after the completion of several optimisation runs For this purpose gp Untis provides the function Timetable comparison described in this chapter First the chapter will introduce a number of settings options rele vant for timetable comparisons Under Settings Miscellaneous open the settings dialogue and select the Timetable tab Here you will find an input block with different settings for comparing timetables Miscellaneous Settings f x HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Value Calculation Wamings fi Timetable version r Timetable comparison Without rooms Detailed comparison for couplings Classes ignore changes in couplings C Comparison w out window arrangement C Tile horizontally Tile vertically Synchronise dates When switching terms set the TT to the beginning of the term v Activate Drag amp Drop in the timetables Cancel Help Settings options for timetable comparisons 301 302 gp Untis Standard Package Timetable Comparison The following settings options are available Without rooms Tick this box if you want the software to ign
78. d E c c 9 Q or win E A M Before school starts 216 gp Untis Standard Package Timetable Layouts Timetable Reports Setti Classes Teachers Rooms Students List All views Class schedule big Te schedule big Room schedule big Overview classes Gverview rooms Overview teachers The example on the previous page shows the timetable of class 1a for Mondays and Tuesdays of school weeks 1 to 19 The PE lesson on Monday is a 2 weekly lesson while DS and GA alternate on Tuesdays No lessons take place in weeks 8 15 and 16 due to the October break and the Christmas holidays Subject timetable The layout of the subject timetable is identical to that of a class teacher or room timetable Subject timetables display all the periods of the selected subject The available layouts are layouts 1 10 and 11 The example shows a subject timetable for German Z DE German Timetable Sub1A 1 Periods week 4 Unscheduled pers x Timetable comparison Timetable Layouts 217 Layout 20 This layout provides a week s overview of all the teachers classes rooms in the school arranged in rows and periods arranged in columns Layout 30 This layout also provides a week s overview of all elements In contrast to layout 20 the elements are arranged in columns and the periods in rows 218 gp Untis Standard Package Timetable Layouts Layout 40 This overview is similar to la
79. data optimisation 127 146 copy amp paste master data 98 timetables 255 core time 264 307 corridor 57 coupled lessons 222 coupling 308 label with a dot in the tt 230 D respect double periods 95 daily fringe period 64 weighting 108 data analysis 125 146 141 date range 206 delete a row sched dia 187 elements 44 the timetable 146 deleting periods in the scheduling dialogue 160 174 in the scheduling timetable 160 in the timetable 153 department 57 59 63 printing the dept in the header 239 printing the tt s of a whole dept 242 description 54 70 in the tt period window 227 in the tt selection window 207 printout in the header 238 details individual timetables 242 print outs overview tt s 246 details window 210 scheduling dialogue 164 diagnosis 140 146 display functions scheduling dialogue 187 displaying a second lesson sched dia 187 alternative rooms sched dia 181 division number 89 do not print empty rows 241 Don t Print N 55 double period 67 68 91 double periods like single periods 230 drag amp drop scheduling dialogue 178 double periods are allowed to span breaks 94 element change name 44 Element Rollup 22 activate double click 23 update elements 23 exporting data via the clipboard 99 exporting views 254 F first name 62 fixed constant text 240 flags markers schduling dialogue 166 footer 250 tt printouts 250 footnote reference 222 fringe periods 296 full name 54 in
80. demo file demo gpn for instance contains the description Special Class see example above Timetable interaction Timetables can be called up manually or set to open automatically if desired when an element is selected in a different window The automated function means that you will always have up to date information on the screen without having to search for it Communication between timetables Open the file demo gpn and call up a timetable for classes teachers and rooms and arrange the timetables next to each other Click on Monday period 1 EN on the timetable of class 1a As you can see the teacher timetable automatically switches to the timetable of the teacher involved in the lesson i e Aristotle Arist and the room timetable switches to the room allocated to this lesson Ria Callas CH R28 2a 2b 3a 3 Special Class Gauss MA R2b 2a 2b 3a 11 Ander MA R3a 2a 2b 3a g Rub EN R1a Ps1 2a 2b 3a B 1a Class ms lolx nix Ria Class Room ta Timetabl pilelps z B x ea Ma tll z 17920 R13 Time range nl m 1792007 30 6 2008 30 Periods week Ho BIDIEIENEIEIES dm em m AR Fa Nobel Ru Nobel n m w EE Rub m Callas Gg Callas RE 33 Arist EN Rla 1a anne Q OPEN 211 212 gp Untis Standard Package Window Set Up Clicking on the coupling row in the p
81. description can consist of a slightly longer EID E al text For other master data it is sufficient to enter the abbreviated name of a description This allows the user to choose between abbreviated and full name when selecting a description for printouts or views For example the descriptions in our demo file serve to clarify the employment status of different teachers full time employed part time supply etc u Sl A ail Alias Names j Full name Art Business Studies General Education Geography General studies History Information Technology Mathematics Music Options Physical Education Physics Politics PSHE Religious education Religious studies Science Spanish Theatre Studies Alias name ART 834 For many purposes it may be desirable to use standardized scl 508 SCI 510 HUM 118 BUI 218 HUM 176 SCI 555 LAN 676 LAN 655 HUM 001 HUM 478 SCI 532 SCI 529 ART 887 SCI 588 HUM 166 scl 500 LAN 611 ART 808 designations instead of the usual master data element names gt Standardized subject designations for printouts for local authorities gt Standardized names for database links to local authorities gt Printouts of timetables If you wish to use alias names on printed timetables tick the option Timetable and activate the relevant option in the appropriate timetable views see the chapter Timetable period on p 228 School Holidays The School
82. elements Class 1a Gauss 42 0 Periods week Lesson number 1 Js Description Time requests Time requests This box automatically receives a tick when a time request is entered for a lesson The Lessons tab Lessons Timetable Codes Values Periods week E Petiods week Alias name re Subject Group i Gauss Teacher Room Students M Enter the number of periods per cuu Students F week for the active lesson 4 Class es Les Groups ug is Students Min D Division No Statistical Code i Students Max Teacher Text Student Course The teacher assigned to the active pee Line text Lessons Tab lesson For coupled lessons this OOOO ine text 1 1 I tne aei field displays the first coupled teacher Subject The subject taught Class es The class es involved in the active lesson For class couplings enter the individual classes separated by commas Lesson Properties 89 Division No The division number ensures that the number of weekly periods can be calculated correctly even when the class has been divided into multiple groups This could be the case for subject lessons where the lessons are not coupled i e do not take place at the same time The view would display 2 lesson rows with for instance 4 periods each The total number of class periods however would still only add up to 4 periods When the two lesson rows lesson numbers have the same division Note num
83. elements You want to enter the text Part time teacher for teachers Anderson Example Hugo and Aristotle P Inthe All Elements window activate the Text cells for the three teachers gt Enter the text Part time teacher and press on Enter The data appears in all the selected cells Most of the techniques described in the last section also apply to the general Master Data windows described in the following chapter 3 Master Data Teacher Fullname Room Text Gauss Newton Hugo t Part time teacher 01 Andersen 0 1 Aristotel 0 1 Callas f Nobel Rubens Cervantes Curie maternal leave starts on 10 Now 0 1 26 Master Data Lessons Seche Classes Teachers Subjects Students All Elements Element R allup Term Ciyervieuw Departments Corridors Descriptions Alias Mames School Holidays Deduction grounds Reasons of absence Display Master Data gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views The master data views In addition to the All Elements window where all the elements are represented in a single window the software offers specialized master data views where individual types of element can be managed in separate dedicated windows Standard views Standard views are views that can be selected directly from a menu For example clicking on the menu item Master Data Rooms displays the standard view for rooms P Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt
84. first and second year classes Correct this error by taking the following steps Teacher 323 Name Full name Le Gauss Gauss ELS Open the element window if not already a j New Newton n Class 1a Gauss f into em ope n 31 0 Periods week Dx wi i Dus gt Drag the name Nobel E Y elc from the element window Cy fae to the lesson window e gt Drop the name in the row for lesson 11 under Teacher Replacing a teacher using Drag amp Drop via the Element Rollup Double click Instead of using Drag amp Drop you can also manage the element window by double clicking on the desired data Using the previous example where teacher Hugo should be replaced with Nobel for the Geo lessons for first and second year classes proceed as follows P In the lesson window click on the row of lesson 11 under Teacher This field is now active Lessons Window 81 gt Immediately afterwards double click on Nobel in the element window You can deactivate the double click function for entering data inthe Note last active cell for example if you are worried about accidental erroneous entries by changing the settings on the Customise tab under Settings Miscellaneous Entering lessons in the form view This section describes how to enter new lessons in the form view Entering a simple lesson gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn Example gt Open the lesson view for teachers
85. for its dependency on other lessons in the upper part of the window on the right hand side of the word Lesson The two numbers in brackets denote the number of couplings the software has finished analyzing and the total number of couplings to be analyzed respectively In addition the information field Investigated variations Investigated variations Lessons 201 516 Total 3 059 219 _ displays the number of combinations the software has D Cancel Start analysis finished analyzing You can cancel the data analysis at any time by clicking on Cancel Start a new CCC analysis by clicking on Start analysis The following example shows how to use the CCC analysis function Open the file demo2 gpn and start the CCC analysis via the menu item Scheduling When the analysis is finished the CCC window appears as shown in the figure below there may be slight variations depending on which version of the gp Untis timetabling software you are using The CCC window As you can see in the upper part of the window there are 86 lessons and 15 couplings resulting in over 2 8 million combinations that need to be analyzed The middle part of the window The middle part of the window shows a table of all CCCs listed in rows The first column contains the total number of periods per week involved in each chain The figures on the right are the lesson numbers of the Analysis of Input Data Example
86. half of Mon 1 Schedule lesson 62 via a class clash for the same period Mon 1 but for the second half of the period see example The two lessons 35 and 63 with a half period each are now scheduled to take place on Monday period 1 starting with lesson 35 You can also schedule half periods in the scheduling dialogue via class clashes See the chapter Scheduling periods with clashes on p 176 8S 1a Class 1a Gauss Tir ble Cla inl xl EO 4 Lessons 63 EZ Mo 1 gt Mo 1 Class es 17 89 2007 30 Other lessons causing a clash Number of clashing lessons 1 WE Save with class clash E TN Lom LIST SET TTONEERT e AHD ssi v a ET ETT al Se ere Ses ero ss ave with teacher cia Callas Cer Bl 1a Ria 1a 1b 2a 2b ss a E IF Save with room clash AJTAGCE25 Ander z3 h22 15 Arist 33 ams Arist EN 1a Ria B9 qe a oh 1a Rte i Schedule half periods m Schedule half periods m 4e J 2 Nobel RE 1a Ria 53 5 Rub DE 1a Ria Lessons 63 Mon s Rs 4 1 1 Hugo GEc 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria Time Mo 1 2 Arist 1ajb SH2 1st half period 2nd half LIUM er Lt Wo jE 204 gp Untis Standard Package gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 Test school DEMO 2 Mozilla Firefox SEE File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Help os G D BO A D fieiefremoiciarmmm 12 htm v c G gp Untis 2008
87. half period and click on OK f Scheduling Dialogue Lessons 73 20 9 2007 Periods 162 30 6 2008 PEG PEB xl Schedule half periods xi Lessons 73 Time We 8 4st half period 2nd half period Cancel az Wednesday O p Les 73 Ha Cla IL No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Cluster The lesson with 1 5 periods will now take place on Wednesday period 7 and the first half of period 8 Manually scheduling half periods 5 Scheduling Dialogue ini xi Lessons f 20 3 2007 30 6 2008 PEG PEB Periods 162 Ld Hugo GEc 2 5 ja Ander DS 1a Arist PEG ja 1a F Allunsched periods Arist EN zl Thursday Thursday 000 0 E Sle Te 8 121 046 li l4 Iel 1 HN LNo Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Spectatted TCTuster 73 Arist PEG SH2 1a 1b We 8 1 For Girls Only Rub PEB SHi1 1a 1b Scheduling Half Periods 203 Half periods can also be scheduled manually using the timetable the scheduling timetable or the scheduling dialogue Open the file Demo4 gpn O De schedule all periods via Scheduling Delete the Timetable Example and change lesson 35 and 63 to half periods L Ma ClTe Per Teacher Subject cesset Subject Home Room MEI BS i 05 Cer Bl 1a R1a Schedule lesson 35 via Drag amp Drop on the timetable for the first
88. has an Italian lesson scheduled the latter component could have a Greek lesson In this case proceed as follows P Define two classes 5aC for the Classics 7i Classes 4 Cla Couplings 271 component and 5aM for the Modern a Al a QA ws Room Class teach TT tithe w LI Languages component As c f Class 1a aue2 Ria gt Enter the name 5a in the TT title field i m under master data of both classes j Class 2a Huge R2a Class 2b Andersen E2h Class Sa Aristotle R3a gt Couple the two class components for TEES RE all lessons attended by the students of Sey Class both groups Class 5a Wurm EE RSA 3 Class 5a Classics L Cla 5ac L Mo Cl Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Roor Doubl Block 5 Plato Latin Sac R5a 2 1 Gauss Mathematic 5aC 5aM R5a 82 15 Goethe German Sac Sah R5a 103 104 105 106 3 2 1 2 Callas Music Sac Sah R5a Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Male Female Line Mathematics 5aC 5aM R5a lll The timetable of both class components can then be combined in a single view In the example on the right the combined class name 5aCM is used for all lessons attended by students of both class components see the chapter Timetable construction on p 251 Seles EJdED x 99 v m8 Qe COD Cl Te Per Teacher Subject i Dante 2 1 5 Gauss Mathematics 2 1 i 5 Goethe German 2 1 i 2 Callas Music Teacher Classes
89. in fringe periods on half days Period Distribution Tab scheduled more than once a day for a class even if the subject is involved in a number of different coupled lessons Avoid errors with double periods gp Untis identifies 2 types of double period errors the splitting of desired double periods and the accidental emergence of undesirable double periods when the same subject is scheduled for consecutive periods Of the 2 errors the optimisation tool assigns a higher priority to the preservation of desired double periods This weighting is connected with codes 2 More than once a day and D Respect double periods You can find these settings in the master data and the lesson window The two codes are mutually exclusive Code 2 causes the weighting for Avoid errors with double periods to be set to 0 unimportant while code D increases the importance of the weighting This increase in importance can result in a situation where a lesson will not be scheduled because the software cannot comply with the double period condition When you set the weighting for Avoid errors double periods to 5 Warning extremely important the optimisation tool rates the importance of the double period condition very high right from the very beginning of the optimisation run and even increases the importance during the run so that at the end of the optimisation process all lessons are treated automatically as if the lessons had been co
90. is scheduled to teach 19 periods per week in total 18 of which have been scheduled 733 periods per year and one of which remains to be scheduled Lessons pr Unecheduled Information Histor Dhaingr suar z ar Huge Huga 20 3 2007 Placed Target Diff Placed Uns Per 30 6 2008 9 Week 3 5 amp 0 eek Tear i344 ir DE Tear Pem Pemanent Teacher Any descriptions or special text entered under lessons or master data is displayed below the statistics The example for Hugo shows that he is employed as a full time teacher 170 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue n Settings Iv Window in the background Scheduling dialogue Bandm What da you want shown in ea Period marker D mui The window logic Like most functions in the gp Untis programme the scheduling dialogue is capable of communicating with all other windows Synchronisation When you open a lesson view or a timetable and select a lesson the scheduling dialogue automatically displays the active lesson Vice versa the lesson window or the timetable always displays the lesson selected in the scheduling dialogue Locking the view Activate the button Keep the source lesson to lock the display of the scheduling dialogue Window in the background As a rule you can bring a window to the front i e activate a window by clicking on any part of the window The scheduling dialogue all
91. locked conditionally the periods already scheduled will not be affected by the placement optimisation process The optimisation tool places only unscheduled periods The subsequent swap optimisation tool however may swap all the unlocked periods The swap optimisation tool uses opti misation strategy A see the chapter Strategies under Optimisation on p 132 Optimisation scheduling E x Swap aptim 2 Optimisation level 1 3 Placement optim Prefered range ggg Mumber of periods to be Ses Ta re scheduled Classes la 4 Subjects RE PEG Override teachers day requests Swap optimisation across classes Prefered range 34 From Ta Classes 1a 4 183 184 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Assess the active time slot Example Assess the active time slot This function assesses all the lesson periods of the week to determine their suitability for scheduling at a specific time Open the file demo gpn and the scheduling dialogue and activate lesson 30 As you can see there is no lesson scheduled for class 1b on Sat 1 The aim of the exercise is to find an already scheduled lesson that could be moved to Sat 1 O Place the cursor on Sat 1 and click on the x button in the tool bar or the x button on the Chained swaps tab of the scheduling dialogue The software now assesses all the periods of the week to determine their
92. per week as a rule of thumb large means greater than or equal to the number of possible morning periods you should investigate the composition of the teacher teams in all the large couplings and if possible remove the critical elements teachers The same applies when the total number of periods of the longest CCC is too high For further details on teacher teams please see the chapter Teacher teams on p 267 The additional module Lesson Planning provides an automated teacher swap function Please see details in the chapter Optimisation on p 130 Data analysis The data analysis can be activated in three different ways Automatically at the start of an optimisation run e g via the optimisation dialogue or the scheduling dialogue O Automatically when opening a saved file O Via Scheduling Diagnosis see the chapter Diagnostics tools below Option 2 above can be deactivated by ticking 7 the box Do not show again until next optimisation The next analysis will only be carried out during the next optimisation run but can then also be suppressed if necessary ings 5 Les sons 2a 2 Lessons 86 Lessons Lessons 30 MA 1b T Lessons 86 DE 4 The data analysis tool checks your input data for consistency highlights errors and draws your attention to potential problems Messages referring to actual errors are highlighted in red When actual errors are identifi
93. periods of a lesson An empty field means that lessons are scheduled as Unscheduled periods Clusters single periods Class Clash Code Timetable Tab Assume that you want to schedule a lesson with 4 periods per week Enter 1 1 in this field to specify a double period Enter 1 2 to allow either a double period and 2 single periods or two double periods Periods in this subject room When a lesson is marked to be taught in a designated subject room the optimisation tool attempts to schedule all periods of this lesson in the designated subject room This may be undesirable when there is a lack of suitable rooms or a problem with room allocation If you want 2 out of 3 Physics lessons to take place in the Physics lab enter the number 2 This field should normally be left empty Block size No consec pers As mentioned above lessons are normally scheduled as single periods Several consecutive periods of the same lesson are referred to as a lesson block This option allows you to enter and modify lesson blocks gt You want a lesson with 5 periods per week to be taught in a block of 4 periods and one single period Enter the number 4 in the box gt Enter 4 3 3 to assign two 3 period blocks and one 4 period block to a lesson with a total of 10 periods per week Note Example Double periods have a special status in a period block and need to Note be entered in the separate Double periods Min M
94. periods to be scheduled Allows you to specify the percentage of periods you want the software to schedule Leaving the field empty means that the optimisation tool will attempt to schedule all the available periods The percentage refers to the periods of the entire school not individual classes A percentage of 30 for instance may mean that the software will schedule 5096 of periods for one class and 10 of periods for another Similarity to previous timetable Allows you to specify if and how much the next timetable should resemble the previously constructed timetable The input options range from O no similarity to 4 great similarity Of course the new timetable always reflects the modifications you make in the scheduling dialogue between optimisation runs Leaving this field empty equals a value of 0 no similarity Lock timetable conditionally If you lock the timetable conditionally the next optimisation run will skip the placement run and only carry out a swap run This means that the resulting timetable will be very similar to the previous one This constitutes an even higher level of similarity than the highest similarity setting 4 great similarity in the function described above Use this function when you have carried out manual changes in the scheduling dialogue and want to start another optimisation run Ticking this option means that your manual changes will be preserved When you combine the two previous f
95. pseudo rooms 21 9 280 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic Room allocation gp Untis offers three different methods of allocating rooms Manual room allocation in the scheduling dialogue on the scheduling timetable or on the timetable see the chapter Ma nual timetabling on p 160 O Automated room allocation during optimisation Optimized room allocation during room optimisation The automated room allocation function during optimisation can only allocate one of the permitted rooms entered for the specific lesson i e a subject room or a designated alternative room When the lesson has no designated subject room the optimisation tool allocates the home room entered for the lesson or one of its alter native rooms In theory this would mean that each lesson could be scheduled in a different room and that classes would have to change rooms every period In practice the room optimisation tool see relevant chapter below tries to prevent this from happening gp Untis may even schedule a lesson for a period where a suitable room is unavailable The lesson is then displayed in the diagnosis window under Subject room missing To suppress this behaviour set the room weighting of the specialist subject room to 4 under master data and the slider for Optimisation of room allocation in the weighting dialogue Scheduling Weighting on the Rooms tab to position 4 or 5 very important or extremely import
96. rows for class 4 e g 5 see ff example on the right Hugo Huga Ander Ander Callas Mobel Rub Rub Cer Arist Ander Curie 2 4 4 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 298 gp Untis Standard Package Subject Sequences Subject sequence for teachers Teachers You can also enter subject sequence requests for teachers This is a useful function for subjects that require elaborate experiments to be set up For example a teacher who teaches Physics to three different classes of the same year may request to have these lessons scheduled in sequence to allow him to show the same experiment several times in a row Another example involves teachers who teach PE plus another subject The PE lessons should if possible be scheduled in sequence so that the teacher is not obliged to change into PE clothes several times a day In both cases enter the same numerical subject sequence code for the lessons you want to schedule in sequence under Subject sequence Teachers Y Rubens L Tea S iai gt Negative subject sequence On the other hand it may be desirable to prevent specific subject sequences If this is the case simply enter an alphabetic subject sequence code letter from A to F The optimisation tool will take into account that lessons with the same alphabetic subject sequence code should not be scheduled in sequence Example For pedagogical reasons the Modern Languages subjects German DE and F
97. schedule big Te schedule big Room schedule big Overview classes Overview rooms Overview teachers t Display Timetables You want to create a customized screen display based on the standard timetable for classes in the demo gpn file Class 1 Full name TeaDiag TeacherDiagnose v Teal Teacher 1 Rool Room 1 V Students 1 v Class 1 New timetable view Open the file demo gpn and call up the New timetable layout timetable overview under Timetable List s Nene ES All Views Class Screen Dispel Fulname L Cancel O Click on the first timetable format class 1 and click on New to create a copy of this timetable view O Assign a new descriptive full name and abbreviated name to the view e g CSD Class Screen Display Anewtimetable view appears Access this view by double clicking on the full name of the view or by clicking on Show the TT Place a tick in the column In menu to include the view in the menu L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Clu 32 Arist PH R3a Gym 4 Yf Disnlay Timetables 3 nml xl Mame CSO Lat dli Teaifher Diagnose ivl Es bie click z Students 1 vl Cla h 1 Class 1 Es T amp a H 1 Teacher 1 L1 Raab 1 Room 1 Est Stu F4 1 Students 1 Ez Cla Class 1 Ez 219 220 Tp Layout 01 Period windo
98. suitability for scheduling on Sat 1 The assessment results are displayed in the lesson row The lower the value the more suitable the period The position for which a period is required is marked with the x symbol in the lesson row see example on the following page Monday period 5 Subject MU Teacher Callas is marked with the symbol 1 and is therefore suitable for moving The lower the value the more suitable the period is for moving The period can be moved to Sat 1 via Drag amp Drop he Scheduling Dialogue ff Scheduling Dialogue ini x il f ae e e lg pj E Unscheduled Information History ta swaps IC ic k Undo i 2b 1b 2b 2a 1a a db db x Fo c o x X 84 m 3 a Cla RE AR AR Wwe Tea Callas 2a 1a 2b 2b 2b 4 4 R XENON x EMEN Ee 4 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday 1i 2 3 amp joie 7 8 t 2 3 4 5 e 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 eo 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 je 7 e fi 2 3 4 5 e e A Ll o LL Eee A 1 0 NEM E Em Bee 2b l PH HI ENS wu M DE CH DE BI HI j 34 Calas DE R2b 2b Replacing teachers Use this function in the scheduling dialogue to replace a lesson teacher with another Open the scheduling dialogue in the file Demo2 gpn and open a teacher timetable O Activate lesson 6 subject CH teacher Callas in the scheduling dialogue
99. the chapter Print Coupling legend on p 244 You want to modify the large class timetable to include the second coupling row O First enlarge the period window by clicking on it the background will turn blue and dragging it to the desired size Arrange the 1Sub 1Tea 1Roo 99 User Defined Views 223 subject teacher and room fields next to each other Insert two new fields one for subject and one for teacher and New field Field type Type of names s Class Short name Teacher Full name Room 7 Lesson number Footnote reference Special text Description Time request Lesson group 1Su 1Te 1Ro 28u 2Te 99 Cluster simultaneous lessons arrange them below the other subject and teacher fields Click on Footnote reference and click on Change field 3 Layout 01 Period window Contents fields of a teaching p x yo 8P Type of Timetable Field type Subject 9 Class TT Students 5 Max characters Teacher TT Room TT Change field M Field type Type of names Change field 2 Sad Short name Ree il Full Delete field Align fields Sai C Use alias Subject C Start and end time O Lesson number Window size Footnote reference 110x 35 Special text Scale 4 1 Description Time request Lesson group Cluster simultaneous lessons 1Su 1Te 1Rao 28u 2Te 99
100. the settings of the b M ME first top most selected element in the list Pernod fram to see example Time requests can also be deleted directly in the scheduling dialogue see the chapter Ma nual timetabling on p 165 Core time If you would prefer the software to schedule morning lessons first enter a time request of 3 for some of the morning periods usually the first 4 under classes Use the Change function described above The time request 3 defines the so called core time The optimisation tool must schedule periods in the defined core time range if at all possible The gp Untis optimisation algorithm regards a core time violation as a serious offence Such violations are displayed in the optimisation window and as individual diagnosis points Please make sure that the number of core time periods entered for an element is smaller than or equal to the number of periods defined for the element Colour codes Use this function to customise the colour codes used to highlight the different time requests on the timetable or in the scheduling dialogue Lunch breaks You can specify the exact times of a lunch break between morning and afternoon lessons for classes and teachers using the time grid You have the following lunch break options P Specify a unified lunch break for the entire school e g 12 00 13 00 In the time grid enter 12 00 as the time when the last morning lesson should end and 13
101. the tt period window 226 G G no fringe period placement 94 H half periods scheduling in the sched dia 200 201 header 250 headings printing 237 home room 59 64 89 HTML 252 index with full names 233 Index 313 ignore 93 Ignore i 55 Information scheduling dialogue 168 input field 206 scheduling dialogue 164 intermediate headings overview timetables 247 inverse 242 K K no alternative room to be used 94 L layout 240 of fields 240 of the fields in the period window 225 Layout 1 timetable settings 229 Layout 2 timetable settings 230 legend 244 overview timetables 247 lesson 245 lesson colour codes scheduling dialogue 188 lesson group 89 lesson groups in the period window tt 227 lesson numbers in the period window tt 226 lesson search in the scheduling dialogue 164 lesson table syllabus 58 lessons couple 85 314 gp Untis Standard Package Index de couple 85 lock element tt 213 type tt 212 lock X 55 lock period in the scheduling dialogue 157 lock periods in the scheduling timetable 157 in the timetable 149 locking lessons 308 locking the view in the scheduling dialogue 170 lunch break 65 min max 60 64 teachers 108 weighting 108 109 m marked 54 93 manual scheduling 146 256 in the tt 146 master class tt print out 62 master data text 207 max Main Subj pers day 60 max periods day 66 max consec Main Subj pers day 60 max consec periods 66 m
102. this lesson by entering a suitable subject You can select several teachers simultaneously from the element window but please note When dropping the teacher list in the grid view of the lesson window central part you will create several single lessons simultaneously Bycontrast when dropping the teacher list in the lesson details window you will create a coupled lesson Creating a new lesson with several teachers gt Click on an empty row in the lesson window P Select the teachers Gauss Callas and Curie from the element window via Ctrl left mouse gt Drag the three names from the element window and drop them under Teachers in the lesson details window see example on the following page 79 80 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window p T L Mao ClTe Per Teacher REZETRIT a Ei Rr M 41 2 Hugo Er TEE l m H ri 2 3 2 Ander a Ga ss Gauss int B3 2 Cer HL Ha Dri 73 12 5 3 Arist b 96 i 1 31 Gauss 31 5 Arist Co a nm E t Class es Subjec Home 35 2 Callas FH 38 2 Callas 46 2 Nobel p 5 15 Rub ee ae Cervantes rpp mE SS 68 F A EN __ a yr Drag amp Drop of several teachers Em TI Assume that while checking the lessons i e the course catalog Modifying the you discover that you have accidentally assigned teacher Hugo course catalogue instead of teacher Nobel to teach Geo to the
103. time request is entered for an element Master Data Properties 55 Important 56 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties Element specific input fields Depending on the master data element displayed on the screen the software offers a variety of different input fields Room sH2 Altern room Rooms Bm Weight Diftsite codes Alternative room Room capacity An alternative room isa room that is functionally Ceide Break super equivalent to the specified desired room and that gp Untis can use for scheduling purposes when the desired room is unavailable Please see the chapter Room logic on p 278 for a detailed description of the alternative room function Room weighting The room weighting gives an indication of the importance of a room for a particular lesson scheduled to take place in that room gt Room weighting 0 gp Untis can schedule lessons even when neither the desired room nor one of its alternative rooms are available useful for lessons where no specific teaching aids are required gt Room weighting 4 a lesson can only be scheduled if the desired room or one of its alternative rooms are available e g PE classes gt Room weighting 1 3 appropriate intermediate levels Note Please note that the allocation of rooms is affected not only by the room weighting but by the function Room Optimisation Please read the chapter Room logic on p 278 under User tip
104. timetable with days across the top lpi x General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML r Range periods Fr To p Period Number You have to set the range of the timetable to ENTIRE SCHOOL YEAR or to r Date WHOLE TERM under Timetable Settings Selection range in order to use 17 9 2007 H 20 6 2008 BAE TE drag amp drop l Total school year Do you want to switch to Total school year Whole Term Monday Monday 38 Calendar week 27 Calendar week No 1 School week 42 School week Before the start of school OK Cancel Apply Help Drag the first lesson of class 1a lesson 11 into the neighbouring timetable window by clicking on the lesson in the second grey column entitled Cl Te and holding down the mouse button see example on the following page While dragging the lesson away the lesson details lesson number teacher subject and class involved in the lesson will be displayed Cells with a green background indicate slots on the timetable where lessons may be scheduled without risk of conflicts The software also takes into consideration any additional settings you have made For instance the display shows that lesson 11 cannot be scheduled on T sdays because teacher Hugo is scheduled to have a free day on Tuesdays Master Data Teachers Time Requests 148 gp Untis Standard Package Scheduling Periods on the Timetable Q
105. timetables with format 20 provide options for the display of additional information such as dates or start and end times see example FF Te ina MONDAY Pr Dun data joi ha pesky plan Sosa 21 Windies pani Bj T 8 14 25 ETE A Monday 31 12 BITA2S 1 Layout 01 Vertical heading Periods heading How h ead i n g S E D ok Came 2 Type of heading Time Format Pers ZE e a m The row headings e g start times can C Start time only Start and end time Period Number rial 13 5 Urna e i50 7 43x 26 M Bold Underlined Scale 5 1 Italic be customized under Row heading under Timetable Settings 4 8 00 8 45 zd tn Cn 240 You can display either the period number or the period times In addition you can choose between single and multiple row display and specify the font type and size As always you will see an example of your settings in the bottom right hand corner of the preview pane 6 1235 13 20 7 13 30 1415 8 1425 1510 Printing Print out timetables by clicking on Print or Print Preview Alternatively you can use the shortcut key Ctrl P This key combination takes you to the Print selection window where you can enter further settings Click on OK to open the print dialogue or the page preview Create customized print views if you want the printed versions of your timetables to differ from the screen di
106. to operate the option Delete rows must be Note deactivated Displaying alternative rooms When the cursor is placed in the room row the function Alterna m tive room becomes active Click on this button to display the next alternative room specified under master data In the example this is the room R1b first alternative room of R1a Click again to show the second alternative room R2a etc O xj 3 Scheduling Dialogue j SET D T ce 2 dai mE Ma ala Ble s 7 T mmm EmIIEILIE ee E PL Physics lab e i HE1 Home Econ room Class Room 1a Rib MN fF Fw C 4 64 Cer BI Rib Alternative room 181 182 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Activate ES Lesson z Lock period Optimisation Activate new lesson Place the cursor on a lesson and click on the lt Activate lesson gt button to activate it Alternatively use the shortcut keys Ctrl Enter or double click on the lesson you want to activate Locking periods Click on lt Lock period gt to lock the cursor selected period or to unlock an already locked period Locked periods will not be moved by subsequent optimisation runs Locked periods are marked in the lesson row of the scheduling dialogue and with an asterisk in the element row You can also highlight an entire area in the scheduling dialogue and then click on Lock period to lock all the selected periods T
107. top ading ontents fields of Heading for indivic eading individ TT TT s print out 1Subje g Layout 01 Period window Contents fields of a teachin Type of Timetable E Class TT Students Change field Delete field Dele H Start and end time Scale 5 1 Number in coupling 1 5 Max characters Field type C Subject C Lesson number Footnote reference C Special text C Description C Time request Lesson group Cluster simultaneous lessons 1St bis ng aps E DK Cancel Apply Help i Field type Teacher Short name Use alias x Type of names Short name C Ful name Cancel 221 User Defined Views The next task is to arrange the three fields for subject teacher and room next to each other in such a way that they are easy to read First enlarge the period window by clicking on it the background will turn blue and dragging the edges until it has the desired size Arrange the three fields as shown in the example Click on the field you want to move When the field is blue the cursor changes to across allowing you to move the field with the cursor When all three fields have been arranged to your satisfaction click on Align fields then on OK The timetable now displays the subject teacher and room for each period i 1a
108. transfer data for local authorities Teacher status Use this field for special status information such as head teacher librarian etc Department s You can allocate any number of departments to an individual teacher This function is particularly useful in connection with the Department Timetable module It also allows you to print separate timetables for individual departments Alias second name This function applies to teachers in the same way as it applies to classes For certain purposes it may be desirable to use standardised designations instead of the usual names Examples include printouts for local authorities or data exports to databases Alias names can be entered via the relevant element or under Mas ter Data Alias Names Birthdate This field is for information only and only affects printing and export Regular school This field is for information only and only affects printing and export Male Female This field is for information only and only affects printing and export Master Data Properties 63 64 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties ValueCorrection Subs Break Supervision Teacher Timetable Values Teach qual Weekly values Home room short name L Lunch break NTP Timetable Tab fi y Lunch break Min Ma H Sched a m p m not both 2 6 MK loadi it Periods day Min Max CARERE CU GS DAIAN Mery important 0 3 N Min M jocum NoNTP s A
109. under section Manual Timetabling on p 146 Entering coupled lessons coupled classes When more than one teacher class or classroom are involved ina Several teachers lesson the lesson is referred to as a coupled lesson The following and several classes example shows how the students of classes 3a and 3b are combined involved in one into a coupled class for the English lesson previously created lesson gt Activate the newly created lesson 96 from the previous example New 3b EN 35 Class 3b Callas L Cla L Ma CL Te Per Teacher Subject Classtes subject roo Home Room Double Black ra Jaa fi Ander PE 1b 3b FL Rib 4 ues 2 Calas AR 3a 3b Ria 11 7B 2 2 3 Arist PEG sab R38 P Enter 3a under Classes after 3b separated by a comma and press lt Enter gt 793 2 2 2 Ander WE 3a 3b R3a 14 10 3 Mew ab Gym Ps You have assigned the additional res class 3a to lesson 96 The grey E 2 Fugo M 23 4 Ander DE column Cl asses Te achers now a 2 Nobel NN s contains the data 2 1 And the amp 2 ce details window now displays both EN classes involved in the lesson 71 SED hs Teache Subjer Classles Subjec Home Room Male Female LETA EN 35 35 Psi 2 Hugo ab Fal Meu Meu This means that English teacher Newton teaches both classes 3b and 3a simultaneously for one period per week T 4 2 Classes 1 Teacher Ent
110. unsuitable as an alternative room for R1b Room Logic 281 282 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic Lock timetable conditionally g Only requested days off for tea v Consider room capacity Offsite buildings by the half day For types C and D lnrrease ne percent Specialist subject room Classes without a designated room Room capacity and optimisation If you want the room capacity to be taken into consideration tick the relevant box in the optimisation or room optimisation dialogue before starting an optimisation or room optimisation run Specify the level of importance of the room capacity function by adjusting the Consider room capacity weighting in the weighting dialogue Scheduling Weighting on the Rooms tab Room optimisation The room optimisation tool attempts to optimize the already optimized timetable by finding the most suitable room available for each lesson The software obeys the following rules Lesson periods will not be moved Double periods or period blocks take place in the same room If possible When the software is unable to schedule all of the periods of a subject in the designated subject room gp Untis tries to ensure that all classes have the same number of lessons scheduled in the subject room e g if the school has 34 classes and only one Physics lab gp Untis tries to ensure that each class has at least one period in the specialist subject room
111. using the demo file as an example gt Start the gp Untis software and load the file demo gpn You will find the demo files under C Program Files gp Untis Each demo file contains a different set of pre entered licence data and school data gt For purposes of clarity close all open windows either via the menu option Windows Close All Windows or by pressing the shortcut keys Ctrl K on the keyboard gt Open the All Elements window via the menu option Master Data All Elements The All Elements window consists of three components the tool 1a Class 1 la Gauss Ria Class 1b Newton Rib Class 2a Hugo R2a Class 2b amp ndersen A2b Class 3a Aristoteles Hi3a Class 3b Callas Ps1 Class 4 Nobel Ps2 bar the selection buttons and the data grid see figure OOOO oO 0 Oo IETETETETEIEI 5 OOO P O OOO a The functions of the tool bar are described in greater detail in a later chapter All Elements 13 Use the selection buttons to switch between the elements Class Teacher Room Subject and Student in the data grid Once you have selected the desired element you can modify the master data for the element or add new master data The demo file already contains some master data which you will see displayed in the grid The following section describes how to use and manage the grid Moving rows You can move individual data sets in the grid by simple D
112. value gives you an indication of how good the timetable really is The lower the value the higher the level of compliance with the given settings and the better the overall quality of the completed timetable Timetable Optimisation Scheduling Timetable Rep Weighting Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation Diagnosis CCC Analvsis Overall Diagnosis Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions 105 106 gp Untis Standard Package Weighting Note Example Scheduling Timetable Rep Optimisation Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation Diagnosis CCC Analvsis Overall Diagnosis Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions Weighting The weighting function forms the basis of the automated timetable optimisation tool gp Untis offers 6 levels of importance ranging from Unimportant 0 to Extremely important 5 which allow you to specify the level of priority given to the individual settings Some weighting points only become effective after specific data has been entered in the master data or lesson window see the chapter Data input Other weightings by contrast are data independent and affect every optimisation run The function Respect the maximum and minimum number of periods per day for teachers for instance is a dependent weighting point since it depends on data entered under Periods day Min Max o
113. which week you want to analyze The details window The details window on the right hand side of the diagnosis window allows you to obtain further information about individual items by selecting the item in the selection window The problem will be displayed in a separate timetable window The following example demonstrates the function of the diagnosis tool Depending on which version of gp Untis you are using the optimisation results may differ from the results shown in this example Open the file demo2 gpn O Opena class timetable via Timetable Classes O Delete the current timetable via Scheduling Delete the Timetable The window Delete the Timetable appears Ignore the two tick boxes and click on OK Open the optimisation dialogue via Scheduling Optimisation Start the optimisation run by clicking on OK The data analysis window appears Again click on OK When the optimisation run is complete you can see in the optimisation information window that the constructed timetable contains several core time violations unscheduled periods with the time request 3 But you cannot see where these violations occur Diagnostic Tools 143 Q Open the diagnosis function Scheduling Diagnosis Detach the pin from the timetable button Lock Type The Lock Type class timetable now becomes an accompanying timetable which means that the display in the timetable window is n
114. with the function Last year s teacher Enter the name from the previous year for a class that will be taught by the same teacher for a second consecutive year The function Last year s teacher is only available in connection with the Lesson Planning and Value Calculation module Dept Department Classes can be allocated to a particular department This function is largely for information only and allows timetables and or class lists to be printed specifically for individual departments This function is particularly important for use with the Department Timetable module Class level This function is only useful in connection with the modules Lesson Planning and Value Calculation Student Timetable and Course Planning Regular school For use with certain import export interfaces Class Timetable Values Timetable Tab Ria Home room short name P NTPs allowed Class group IF Lessons not on adjac days iL Lunch break NTP 2 EHE alae MAr Mla H Sched am p m not bath 45 Periads dauy Min blas fr Keep cur loading pattern p Mas main subject pers day 2 Mas consec main subj per day Master class TT _print out Home room This function allows you to enter the name of the classroom assigned to a particular class Please see the chapter Alternative rooms under User Tips for details on classes without a designated classroom Special class group This input field is designed specifi
115. 2 40 TT 3 4094 TT 4 40 TT 1 100 TT 2 100 TT 3 100 TT 4 100 etc 134 gp Untis Standard Package Optmisation Strategy D Percentage planning in several series Optimisation strategy D is a combination of strategies B and C gp Untis initially schedules the percentage of periods specified under Of periods to be scheduled as in Strategy B This means that the software constructs a number of series of n timetables until the final timetable can no longer be improved upon As with strategy C the best timetable is locked conditionally and used as the basis for the next optimisation step where the percentage of the periods to be scheduled is increased by increments The default value for the increase is 1096 unless you have specified a different value The percentage of periods to be scheduled is increased by increments until the software reaches the point where it attempts to schedule all the periods 100 TT 2 30 TESI gr TT 1 40 1 100 gt 30 TT3 30 etc TT a TT 2 30 SEN TT 3 40 10 TT 3 100 4 30 x TT4 304 G5 T TT 3 304 TT 4 40 TT 4 100 TT 4 30 The accompanying window Start the optimisation process by opening the optimisation dialogue Scheduling Timetable Rep under Scheduling Optimisation entering the desired settings ee and clicking on lt OK gt Oplmised Timetables If the data analysis window appears check the displ
116. 36 several classes on one timetable 251 timetable comparison 207 window 208 timetable comparison 301 306 timetable interaction 211 title 62 U undo manual scheduling 163 180 unlocked timetables 212 user defined views 219 V V variable teacher 96 view 309 views import export 254 W window set up 205 window in the background in the scheduling dialogue 170 X X 166 in the scheduling dialogue 166 in the scheduling timetable 155 locked 93 x 166 in the scheduling dialogue 166 in the scheduling timetable 155 Index 317 318 gp Untis Standard Package Index GRUBER amp PETTERS SOFTWARE A 2000 Stockerau Belvederegasse 11 e 43 2266 62241 0 e office grupet at e www grupet at
117. 64 mrssrulcelE 165 DECR T mtm 165 Flags AICI 166 Displaying abbreviated names sissarsscnccisistuanenioranentnedutidasiudsasanassmcuebanonduanlass 167 Saving Ndivid al SOU GS sie circ cece icta bra deut astaui baci beo ENEE ERENER EAL R NEE 168 The Intormation TaD setae acer ate tap eseatlaceed di seed Gene ooeter bene s secant eset acd aee E 168 The window lOgiC strc tes iseopaateesnmeunnea dare wtdniantescebeancondesinneseracuhievedennustuaoriesetons 170 Scheduling PEGAS uenire eee enn nn eee ne nen enna ten Per nee eee ce fee ee E 172 Deleting periodS PNE ERR 174 Schedule periods with clashes Lira coat erar roa t rq ibn Evene Pa be esto ones 176 i ccn CI M M T EE 176 Teacher and or room clashes scesdiesdiestuedtetess pretia eer iter tini tinere sad eiie biens 177 Moving periods via Drag amp Drop seyavecwncaricerttentosssxaresenceaiarsersessyiaeeressteveseoesideses 178 Contents 7 Mie TNNCRNT 180 ANOCaUNO TOOITIS sictirccsencsterai nir E E Su IRaURFAPEU LI ITO S 180 ROOM SWAN M 180 Displaying alternative OOM verssuierccenxo sex zuvasuxw sva uds drtua vesa YkYROSd 1 eua a rd ralem iude 181 Activate new lesson ssssssssssseseseeee eene nnne nnne enar sna sena rasan a aan 182 LOCKING DENOI NET T T TT 182 eet cce We NU Mn 182 Assess the active time slot a ecescizussnices
118. AR 1a This lesson with 2 5 periods is scheduled for Monday periods 1 to 3 The half period is scheduled for the second half of period 1 The scheduling dialogue displays the marker O for this half period Open the timetable of class 1b and activate Monday periods 4 and 5 Here the half period is scheduled for the first half of the period The scheduling dialogue displays the marker O for this half period For two consecutive lessons of half a period each such as on Friday periods 3 4 for class 1b the scheduling dialogue displays the marker OY When working with half periods the following markers can appear in the scheduling dialogue for the active lesson Half period in the first half of a period Half period in the second half of a period E Q ES Fal O ON Two consecutive half periods scheduling Half Periods 199 200 gp Untis Standard Package Scheduling Half Periods Scheduling half periods using the timetable Example Open the file Demo4 gpn O Set the class timetable to the Total school year on the Selection range tab under lt Timetable Settings gt De schedule all periods via Scheduling Delete the Timetable Schedule the first unscheduled lesson of class 1a for Mon 1 via Drag amp Drop from the lesson window When dropping the lesson on the timetable a dialogue box appears asking you how you want to schedule the half period as an entire period or as a half period befo
119. Class Clash Code COC 11 11 ee eee eren nennen nr rena nnn nnum ua uuuu nana uana uana 299 Timetable comparison e 301 GLOSSARY qe S 307 10 gp Untis Standard Package Contents Foreword In the course of over 30 years development the gp Untis software has grown into a powerful timetabling tool The sheer number of different functions and options not to mention the very size of this manual can therefore appear intimidating to users unfamiliar with the programme For this reason we would recommend that you first study the much more concise manual entitled Getting Started With the aid of simple examples the Getting Started manual guides you through the different levels of timetable construction including programme installation input of school data master data and lessons construction of the timetable using optimisation and diagnosis tools manual timetabling options and printing the finished timetables for teachers classes and classrooms In principle this manual covers the same ground but in much greater detail and should therefore be regarded as a reference guide rather than an instruction manual We would recommend that you use this manual when you come across situations not covered in the Getting Started manual or if you want to study the advanced functions of the software to enable you to use the gp Untis timetabling programme more effectively Maste
120. Customise the view allows you to Show and hide columns selecta font style for individual columns bold italic underlined select the desired alignment for individual columns left right or center and assign a colour to individual columns Note With the exception of colour the chosen settings will also appear on printouts Customise the view Customise the view X IO OO ET KI KI KI Ki OR Cancel Apply Full name Description Marked m Lock X Don t Print N Stat Code s Dept Rm Weight Off site codes Capacity Corridor Crrricinr Settings You can save the position arrangement and contents of windows in separate files at any stage during the timetabling work allowing you to access desired information quickly and easily at any time By the same principle the All Elements window can also be saved at different stages of the editing process Each separate stage can then be called up with the click of a button Creating a new view For administrative purposes you require a printed list of all the rooms in the school including details on room capacity For the construction of the timetable however you require additio nal information such as the room weighting and alternative rooms details you do not want to appear on the above list Solve this problem by saving two separate versions of the window i e the version Printed List and the v
121. DS R1a PL 1b Curie TX HE1 CL 1a 1h Each planning step carried out on the timetable or the scheduling timetable is logged on the History tab and can be undone via the Undo button Clicking on Delete will delete all the planning steps shown in the list g Scheduling Timetable All the functions of the scheduling timetable described above are equally applicable to the scheduling dialogue please see the following chapter 164 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Rep Weighting Optimisation Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation Diagnosis CCC Analvsis Overall Diagnasis Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions Lessons m 20 3 2007 30 6 2008 The Scheduling Dialogue The scheduling dialogue offers the most advanced functions for placing and moving periods manually Similar to a peg board the periods of the week are arranged in columns at the top and the elements teachers classes rooms in rows along the side The following example provides an overview of the type of information displayed in the scheduling dialogue gt Open the file demo gpn and the scheduling dialogue under Scheduling Scheduling Dialogue The input field Ente the lesson number of the lesson you want to view or mo fy le on 11 in the xample in the input field Lesson search Instead of ente
122. DS a PL Ria 4 B adis M EM 2 2 Arist PEG tab SH2 Fla 5 7 Exercise Group S 31 Arist MA ta Ria 5 4 M 33 A Arist EM 1a R1a B 5 The Book Club M I alas MU 1a Rda ni 3 M EM cuc lan lia Ria 4 5 N You can also enter new teacher data for coupled lessons The tool bar functions The functions of the lesson window tool bar are similar to the tool bar functions of the master data windows Resizing the window The function of this button is similar to that in the master data window The first click resizes the frame to the size of the grid view the second click to that of the form view The third click by contrast resizes the frame to the width of the lesson details window shortcut Alt Gr left mouse click and the fourth click on the button restores the original size of the window The option Auto size for the details window under Settings Miscellaneous allows you to specify if the third click on this button should simultaneously adjust the height of the lesson details window Grid Adjustment Dialogue A detailed description of the functions of the grid adjustment dialogue can be found in the chapter The master data views Resize El Window Note Grid F Adjustment 84 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window D New Delete u Serial x U u change bA Filter Example 8 Class 1a Gauss L Cla New Creating a new lesson Use this button to create a new lesson Details can be found in the chap
123. Diagnostic Tools Scheduling Timetable Rep Weighting Optimisation Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation Diagnosis CCC Analvsis Overall Diagnosis Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions You now need to decide if you want to accept the displayed violations or take evasive action One option would be to increase the weighting for Time requests for classes to enable the optimisation tool to place a greater emphasis on this function While working with the diagnosis tool keep checking items to which you have assigned a low weighting as there could also be hidden input errors in areas often regarded as unimportant Overall diagnosis The overall diagnosis function provides an overview of the classes and teachers that have ended up with the worst timetables measured against your settings Call up the total diagnosis function via Scheduling Overall Dia gnosis The overall diagnosis function applies to only one week for the same reasons stated above for the diagnosis function see previous chapter Select the desired week via the date combo box Next to the date combo box you will see another box where you can specify if you want to display a teacher list or a class list The list itself is organized in order of least desirable timetable The first column of the list entitled Points contains the total number of penalty points Additionally the list display
124. Gauss Gauss L No Cl Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double SS b 37 i Gauss MA 2a2b3a Rob iba Hes Eos Delo Ma fd uli oom Homel ta ta teas ps ete T1 3 a Rus 1 4 Gass Mma 3a F9a 5 L2 2 Gauss 6A ja O oa 10i a 12 2 Gauss GA a Pa 11 1 5 2 Gauss GA 4 1 Pa 041 2 1 2 4 Gauss MA 4 1 DE 2p3 sua a aden IBS Dis T View with Lessons of the Eus o p ha element activated Curie TX lab Gauss MA ja Ra Gauss GA 3a R3a eee te Aa r Curie TA 3b us GA M 4 Y O pE J Ander MA Ps2 Gauss MA Print selection l x Teacher 1 12 Details Selecti Printout with coupled rows BENE puse Layout Page setup Type of list Heading P Tick the option Deductions if you want to include E Data fields deductions in the printout of the lessons Thisis mete sar only important with the module Lesson Planning _ me Help You can also print out the time requests for the individual lessons 195 76 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window Entering lessons Lessons can be entered in the form or in the grid view Entering lessons in the grid view The following examples demonstrate how to enter new lessons in the grid view Entering a simple lesson gt
125. H 4 Fila Current Content Gymnasium Physics lab Fi2a New Content Whole File Selection Only Home Econ room d Class Room 1a Rib Time Requests Class Room 1b R2a Delete Cancel Class Room 2a R2b Class Room 2b R3a Class Room 3a Pseudo Room 1 3b R1a Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a NNN NN NN 4 4 CO CO The alternative room for rooms R3a and Ps1 will be changed from H1ato R2a The Serial change function can also be used to place flags binary input fields gt Open the view Room B from the previous example by accessing Master Data Display Master Data v Open the grid adjustment dialogue Activate the field Marked m and tick the box Query v P Enter the value CI in the row Full Name under Selection and click on Apply W Query Roo B Jnixi The new view shows only the rooms beginning with CI In 3 pal as the demo file these are the classrooms of the school see KE Dixie elt figure on the left Name Class Room 1a Please note that the Query function is case sensitive Class Room 1b Class Room za Class Room zb Class Room 3a Master Data Views 49 P Place the cursor in the grid view under Marked peres E xj and click on Serial change Leave the field Current Conten Current Content empty and enter x in the field aoe New Content New Content Whole File Selection Only P Click on OK Time Requests Delete Cancel
126. Holidays function allows you to enter holiday dates to ensure the correct weekly display of timetables The function is also relevant for use with the additional modules Cover Planning Lesson Planning and Value Calculation and Multi Week Timetables Disregard this function if you are not using these modules Reasons of absence This function can be used for describing reasons of absence The function is only relevant for use with the module Cover Planning Display Master data The list of predefined master data Masestidlhalessssilsas views is accessible via the menu item Display Master Data For further details on how to create new views modify existing views and include views in the menu please see the appropriate chapters under The master data views on p 35 os Teacher Subject Roam Class A Teacher A Subject Room Class B Teacher Subject B Haom B Corridor Lesson T able Syllat Groups Department Students Description Class Teacher Subject Room F iT or Master Data Properties HOODOO LU LLL Type Quer Class Teacher Subject Room Class Teacher Subject Room Class Teacher Subject Haom Corridor Lessons tal Group Departmen Students Description Class Teacher Subject Room LIETETETEFENETERFEFETETETETETEIETETEIEIFETELNEI ini x 71 12 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Lessons If you are unfamiliar with the gp Untis software prog
127. KB 14 KB 16 KB 15 KB 14 KB 14 KB 14 KB 14 KB 14 KB 14 KR Details Fage setup Background Ok Com p Cancel Type GIF Image GIF Image GIF Image HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Document HTML Dariiment P Select the elements you want to print i e save in HTML format and customise settings and details e g legends etc as normal Xl gt Click on HTML gt A file dialogue box appears Enter the name of the directory where you want to save the HTML files and click on lt Save gt An index file will be created for each output allowing access to each of the issued elements The index file name is based on the format used e g CLA HTML Use the file to open the index with the links to the exported elements gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 Untis UK 1 Mozilla Firefox File Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Help DER 12 03 Index 3 4 4 s 6 8 7 8 8C 1iL Nur Rec RecC 2 21 JEDER ra rn prs um N 12 35 13 20 S BO CDD eessen v Oc Gd gp Untis 2008 Timetable 2008 2009 Untis UK 24 07 07 8 00 8 45 8 5 9 40 9 50 10 35 i0 5 MEE 11 i ia History Music 12 25 Compton Richards 8 4 Timetables in HTML Format Richards gp
128. Main subj day fda Class 1a Gauss Ala p ib Class 1b Newton zl 5 2a Class 2a Hugo SH1 Sports Hall 1 9b Class 2b Andersen SH2 Sports Hall 2 3a Class 3a Aristoteles Gm sla 3b Class 3b Callas CL Chemistry lab SE NI Class 4 Nobel HE1 Home Econ room e Ria Class Room 1a Rib Class Room 1b R2a Class Room 2a A R2b Class Room 2b R3a Class Room 3a Ps1 Pseudo Room 1 3b Ps2 Pseudo Room 2 4 All Elements 25 Entering element names via the keyboard Instead of selecting the desired element from the list as described in the previous example you can enter the name directly in the field The lt Auto complete gt function compares your input with known element names and will attempt to auto complete the entry to save you from having to type the full name Accept the suggestion made by the Auto complete function by pressing the Tab DK 39 E a Sr o ofti v 3 Master Data Class key Class Teacher Room Subject Students Name Full name Room Text Lunch break Main subj day Codes Class 1a Gauss Hla 4 1 Class 1b Newton Rib The Auto complete function can be Dass 2a Huge EES deactivated on the Customise tab under perm cese tot Settings Miscellaneous Class 3b Callas Class 4 Nobel Serial input selection A particularly useful function is the serial input option that can be used to enter data for a selection of
129. R3a 2a 2b 3a Rub EN R1a 2a 2b 3a Hugo EN R1a 2a 2b 3a Nobel DE 2a 2b 3a 1 DE 2a 2b 3a Gruber amp Petters Software Ss pee en B pre oes fie F8 7 Printing 245 Lesson Printouts of class and teacher timetables can also include the lesson view Select the desired lesson view via the button in the Lessons section of the Print details window The short name of the selected lesson view will be displayed on the button e g L Tea or L Cla The print settings specified for the lesson view will also apply to the printout The example shows the timetable of teacher Newton complete with lesson distribution Newton Isaac ME eroe pen oo tem tore on New MA a O R2 5 New PH 2a Gm Ra New PH 2 Om Ra LN 8 93 New MA 23 JR2b ie es Bs sr J MEM EMSEL ELLU UEEL New New ru TqBak OS zi i E Number of timetables in a New PEB SH1 vertically One timetable for each week Print details Individual timetable r Timetables per page Number of timetables New page for each element r Coupling legend footnote Abbreviations 5 Placemt of the legend Type of abbreviation No legend No abbreviations Gruber amp Petters Software E EER Placement of abbrev No abbreviations IV Use alias Print frames g Number of columns Print frames Cance
130. Show all fields with content This very useful function is designed to temporarily activate all the fields in the grid view for which data has been entered A further mouse click on this button restores the original window display so E 14 00 Vale eS oe s Marked jm Change HL DE EN H So MA G Bi PH Mu E am os p H K IPER Lock form view When this function is activated i e when the button is clicked in the relevant form view will remain unaffected by the processes in other windows gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt Open the master data view for rooms Master Data Rooms and a room timetable Timetable Rooms gt Scroll through the timetable from one element to the next SH1 gt SH2 gt Gym The element that is active on the timetable SH1 gt SH2 gt Gym will also be displayed in the form view of the room master data Master Data Views 51 P Select the room SH2 in the room master data view and click on Lock this display gt Scroll through the timetable from one element to the next SH2 gt Gym gt PL As you can see the room master data view is no longer affected by element changes on the timetable Click Click zi ZPL Physics lab Timetable Rool 3 Rooms Roo etm Physics lab Home Econ room Class Room 1a Class Room 1b R2a Class Room 2a R2b Class Room 2b R3a Class Room 3a Ria Pseudo Room 1
131. The following descriptions apply to individual timetables with formats 1 and 10 Timetables per page Specify how many timetables you want to print on one page The example on the following pages shows a page containing 6 teacher timetables Print details a X Individual timetable Timetables per page 2 Number of timetables horizontally f Number of timetables in a vi nue TEE for each week Print selection i Ibbresiations Teacher 1 12 i a SANE Type of abbreviation Selection No abbreviations Page setup Placement of abbrev Background Mo abbreviations DIRE Cancel Number of columns Print frames 2 bes hea Lesson display of lessons Im E Printing exte 2907 Tine SOTO fated DEMO sbiri 2000 Iada SO fetid DEMO u Vada trem 0 Oita For dimo and hut anie 2 Vabd Tem 10 Oetober Ff ot dta and rt enl Gauss Carl Friedrich Andersen Hans Christian Several timetables on one page m Unie oor ti ented TAVA Ato muo t M a vts 2007 fidel eder o lim to puo e v amd sd orh ad tow 10 Diba Fa derro acd eed rk ad rere O Ode Ft der Newton Isaac a Ure 2007 feet Ae doen o Vaid tere 10 Oddy ihlettu edonthe Ire amp ima to nuo alt tum O Orde Fo demo and tert orh Callas Maria retimas o ruo hs ap usate mcr t Fit ares and ert a n v 3 gp Untis MultiUser 2007 demo Test school DEMO Timetable 2007 2008 EBR
132. Timetable 2008 2009 Test school DEMO 19 07 07 15 18 la Friday Girls PE Religious Education Aristotle Nobel SH2 Ria Girls PE Aristotle Religious Education Nobel Ria 8 00 8 45 8 55 9 40 9 50 10 35 10 45 11 30 11 40 12 25 12 35 13 20 13 30 14 15 14 25 15 10 15 20 15 05 gp Untis 2008 3 Gruber amp Petters Gruber amp PettersSoftware Timetable display Window Set Up 205 Timetable Reports Setti Classes Teachers When the timetable is complete the information needs to be eU presented in a clear and unambiguous fashion gp Untis offers a Suus number of different timetable layouts and numerous timetable display options The following chapter provides an overview of pre constructed timetable displays and shows the different methods of shaping timetable layouts to suit individual requirements Window set up The menu item Timetable provides a number of pre constructed timetables for classes teachers rooms and subjects and students when using the Student Timetable or Course Scheduling modules Basically a timetable window consists of the tool bar and three separate components the selection window at the top the actual timetable in the middle and the period details window at the bottom The tool bar The tool bar is usually located at the top of the window but can be moved to any window edge right left or bottom and can even be dragged out of the window altogether
133. Tx CL 2b 2a Ander DS PL 2b 2a 159 160 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Timetable Delete period The lesson is locked Lessons 6 Unechedule the lesson anyway Don t show this message again w The period details window now shows that two lessons are scheduled for Fri 7 classes 2a and 2b Ge Mew GA RZa za 26 81 Curie Ts CL Zh 2a Ander DS FL 2b 2a Further options for scheduling conflicting lessons can be found in the chapter The scheduling dialogue on p 176 Deleting periods Delete scheduled periods by selecting the period and clicking on lt Delete period gt or by pressing the lt Delete gt key The lesson will appear on the Unscheduled window again Alternatively delete the active lesson with a double click When attempting to de schedule a locked period a message will appear asking you if you wish to proceed Periods can also be de scheduled by dragging them to the period details window see also the chapter Deleting periods on p 153 under Scheduling periods on the timetable Allocating rooms Use the button lt Allocate Delete Room gt to allocate a room to a scheduled period or to delete an already allocated room This function is available on the timetable on the scheduling timetable and in the scheduling dialogue he Scheduling Timetable Exam p le 4 Scheduling Timetable E lolx You want to allocate different rooms to the Texti
134. Wg Num Diagnosis 4 2 Subj 1 day imposs Less double pers 1 4 Missing teachers 14 unchbreak Too shor Core Time Violations 7 Too few per day Too many pers d 3 o 5 e o 2 E D T rg e beoveeorereg Bescnensnee Type of diagnosis In optimisation teacher v Les Lessons Weighting Number 14 L No Lesson number Changed Teac ln optimis L No Changed Teac Ander 81 Ander 43 New Strategies After a successful teacher swap a display of all swapped and originally assigned teachers can be viewed via Scheduling Dia gnosis The figure on the left shows a situation where the Teacher function i e teachers suitably qualified to teach the subject is active and teacher New was replaced by Gauss for lesson 94 The lesson details window displays the current and the replaced teacher see figure gp Untis offers four different optimisation strategies for automated timetabling Strategy A Calculate a series of n timetables Using strategy A gp Untis constructs a series of timetables with n individual timetables where n stands for the number you have entered under Optimisation series No of TTs 1 20 Each timetable is saved J0est timetable in a dedicated file work1 gpnto workn gpn in the gp Untis directory can be retrieved and analyzed at any time The best timetable is saved as workO gpn and
135. You can also remove unwanted buttons from the tool bar Customise via right mouse click see example The following chapters provide a detailed description of the tool bar functions Students 000 List igen Views Arist PEG Period D Rub PE SH 206 gp Untis Standard Package Window Set Up Teacher Room Subject Students 4 Spin Controls Timetable Settings Selection window The selection window in the upper part of the timetable window allows you to select the type of timetable you want to display The window also provides additional information such as the number of periods per week and the unscheduled periods Fa Class 4 Nobel Timetable E 1 Oj x gu DAS E S TT n Type of element i ccm 0 Periods week eduled p Timetable comparison Periods week Spb Only modifi tables Tm acy llr el BENE Siti Timetable CK Type of element Element types class teacher room etc can be changed via a dedicated drop down list Input field Use the input field to enter the name of the element whose timetable you want to display Switch between different elements by using the spin controls located on the right window edge or by placing the cursor in the input field and pressing the Page Up and Page Down keys or the up and down cursor keys Date range Specify the date range for the timetable by selecting the desir
136. a Room Ox lt ca a n E Ba ul 3 printediist 7 Mame Full name Altern room Text Description Capacity Codes P SHI Sports Hall 1 sH2 Renovation in September T SH2 Sparts Hall 2 5H1 ex Gwn Gymnasium PL Physics lab EL Chemistry lab THEY Home Econ room Ala Class Room 1a H1b 36 Rla Rib Class Room 1b R2a 30 H3a Class Room 2a Hzb 32 B2B R26 Class Room 2b Aisa R3a Class Room 3a Fila Psi Pseudo Room 1 3b Ala zZ Ps2 Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a Zz gt Click on Settings and save the current window appearance under a suitable title such as Room planning DefaultLight PrintedList From now on you can activate the saved settings by double clicking on the name of the window appearance you require Close All Elements 19 If you are unfamiliar with the gp Untis software we would recommend BETTE j using the beginner s default settings predefined for all element x i RS types D efaultLight FD efaultBeginner Default Printing When the All Elements window is active after clicking on the window i e when the window is at the front and the title bar is dark blue the buttons Print and Print Preview will also be active Clicking Print on either of the two buttons will bring up the Print selection dialogue ed Print Preview Select the elements you want to print b
137. a 2b Ala O O Detail window gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt Open the standard view of lessons sorted by class Lessons Classes The display on the screen should correspond approximately to the example on the left The window consists of four main components the tool bar the form view the grid view and the detail window The tool bar functions are described in detail in a later chapter The functions of the form and grid views are identical to those in the master data windows The form view displays a particular lesson complete with all its associated attributes The grid view contains a row per lesson where the selected lesson attributes are displayed In the master data window the software programme identifies master data by element name In the lesson window this function is carried out by the automatically created lesson number this number cannot be modified You can specify which one of the two the lesson number or the element name should be displayed first on the form view The relevant settings can be found on the Customise tab under Set tings Miscellaneous x HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Value Calculation W amings Import Export Menu Data Entry C Al menu items v Auto complete For element Sub menus per country Drop down C Menus for the country C Mouss Class 1a Gauss Show the fi
138. a lunch i RII break at the same time figure on the left fi 4 Maximum number of classes with lunch break at the same time g TT f ERE Violations against specified lunch break times Double periods must not span this break are displayed in the diag nosis window Dff site transfer possible in this break w2 2 73 34 45 5 6 6 7 7 8 Avoid undesirable lunch breaks for teachers and classes by activating the code L Lunch break 2 NTP for the selected element Cancel Apply Help Couplings The composition of couplings have a major effect on the quality of a timetable Unfavourable couplings can prevent the construction of a high quality timetable The following criteria are important for the creation of couplings Teacher teams Teacher teams are required for instance in PE lessons where a class is divided into a male and a female group Each group requires its own teacher and both teachers must always be scheduled at the same time If the teacher of the girls PE lesson has already been scheduled to teach this group at a given time the boys PE teacher cannot be scheduled to teach a different subject or a different class at this time As a general rule it is desirable to keep the number of teacher teams as small as possible and to ensure that individual teachers are only part of a teacher team if absolutely necessary see the example at the end of this chapter To help you organize you
139. age Up and Page Downs keys to navigate within the timetable Use the following tool bar buttons to modify the timetable display Resizing the window Resize E the window This function adjusts the window frame to the size of the displayed timetable window Other element in timetable period a Other element p in period Use this function to switch to another element in the timetable window in the order classes teachers rooms subjects Window Set Up Next element in timetable period m Next element Use this function to display the next element of a coupled lesson gt in period on the timetable Period timetable This button can be used to call up the timetable of the element currently displayed in the active period of the timetable gt Open the file demo gpn Example P Activate the class timetable of class 1a y TT of DH per element th Next element gt Click on Next element in period Instead of the originally in period displayed subjects the display now shows the teachers on the timetable gt Activate period 3 on Wednesday Arist MA R1a The active eriod now shows the teacher Arist P nj TT of per element gt Clickon TT of per element to call up the timetable of teacher Arist ba Chass 1a Gauss Timetable lax I AP Arist Aristoteles Timetable a ni xj X M53 2007 30 6 2000 Click d be
140. ailable to other gp Untis users minus school data or import the formats into other files Use the same method to import formats from a gpf or gpn file Using the clipboard Using the clipboard you can export timetables to other programmes such as word processing programmes Proceed as follows Click on the timetable you want to export title bar must be blue Copy the timetable to the clipboard menu command Edit Copy or via the shortcut Ctrl C Switch to your word processing programme Select Edit Pas te to insert the contents of the clipboard in the form of an image The Edit Paste function can also be used to export the legend Paste 5pecial Source Unknown Paste Unformatted Text Bitmap Device Independent Bitmap Unformatted Unicode Text Result i Inserts the contents of the Clipboard as a bitmap picture This Format can take up a lot of memory and E disk space but is exackly what vou see on Ehe screen Using the Clipboard Edit View Insert Format To unde Font Color Cr Repeat Fonk Color Ctrl Y Cut Ckri4 X Chrl C Chrl Paste Special 255 256 gp Untis Standard Package Using the Clipboard C Bilvertsz Microsoft Word t File Edit View Table Window TY T WEE HEATER i A4 Normal mak Insert Format Tools Van Dale Type a question For help X EE T 125 Eor AE Times NewRoman 12 B Z U
141. aily Fr Break Max periods day C Teacher Optimisation Code Max consec prds D Subject room short name This function allows you to specify subjects taught in dedicated subject rooms Please see the chapter Room logic under Timetable Optimisation for further details Afternoon pers week min max The minimum and maximum number of afternoon periods for this subject Use this field to specify the minimum and maximum number of periods per week that the subject should must be scheduled in the afternoon Periods week min max Minimum and maximum number of weekly subject periods This function is only relevant for use with the Lesson Planning module where you can enter the minimum and maximum number of periods the subject should be taught per week if at all This option is not relevant for use with the standard package of the gp Untis software Subj Sequ Teachers The numbers 1 9 direct the software to construct teacher timetables where subjects with the same number are scheduled in consecutive periods The letters A F by contrast prevent the software from scheduling subjects in consecutive periods Please also see the chapter Subject sequence under User tips Subj Sequ Classes The numbers 1 9 direct the software to construct class timetables where subjects with the same number are scheduled in consecutive periods The letters A F by contrast prevent the software from scheduling subjec
142. alves The optimisation tool decides whether to schedule the half day in the morning or the F ub z Paul Rubens aftern oon Unspecified day requests Requested Days am pm Halves Note Use unspecified time requests whenever a jm Fal N a possible to allow the optimisation tool as much eb p pp flexibility as possible zuo NE No Ep Unspecified blocks In addition to the above you can enter unspecified p Numberotdays Period tomto blocked periods for each element The example on the right shows a time request for teacher Gauss He would like three free periods Gauss D Cai Fiedich Gauss specifically periods 2 4 ee Dad TEQUE TY on three days of the week Requested Days Tip From version 2007 onwards time requests can Unspecified a be entered directly in the E Mumber of days Ium Period from to scheduling dialogue Time Requests 263 Copying time requests Edit Master Data Less Cut Paste 1 Paste Special You can copy the time requests of an element to the clipboard and paste them in different elements First Element Last Element Previous Element Deleting time requests Next Element Delete the time requests of all the elements of a view at the same time by clicking on Serial Change and then on Delete in the Time Requests section of the dialogue box P Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn Example gt Open the master data view for teachers Master Data Teache
143. an be changed in the upper right hand corner of the window Click on New field to insert additional headings into your timetable see example on the following page The following additional headings are available f Layout 01 Individual timetable with days across the top General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML gt View Clal Class 1 Font size in TT Layout 01 Individual timetable with days Per overview f 00 Field type Short name aray across the top Short name Arial 18 0 Plead lenand 100 Leftaligned Bold Arial 3 0 uices 5 Max characters gt Font fo Right aligned Italic Heading 100 e Font si t 50 500 PRU eS Day names heading 200 Font size as a percentage C Centred Underlined Row heading Periods heading Pelod updow Contents fields of a teaching period Weading indui TT Heading for individual Heading individ TT T fpintoul OK Cancel Apply Help Text Description You can assign a text and a description of your choice to each master data element via Master Data Descriptions and instruct the software to include these details in the headings of printouts The example shows a heading containing the text and description entered under the master data for class 4 The two fields are arranged side by side The maximum number of chara
144. an display the abbreviated names of the elements involved in a lesson by selecting the desired names under Settings Font Arial 3 0 Grid Width Height Selection range idth in 20 j 180 ved width in 20 n First period G ight in 20 0 v acd in 20 Boc Last period he Scheduling Dialogue si Scheduling Dialogue do I g J 38 Lessons 2 Unscheduled Information History Chained swaps i 2032006 Les Time Cla Tea 30 5 2007 6 11 eae f Rooms Roo BED x Ali 9 1 1a Hugo GEc 73 1 1a Arist PEG Full name Altern room Rm Weigh Off site code Sports Hall 1 SH2 4 Sports Hall 2 SH1 Gymnasium Gym NNN NM Rib R2a Class Room 2a R2b Class Room 2b R3a Class Room 3a Ra Class Room Ria s Pseudo Room 1 3b R1a NNN FO P2 PO NY 4 FW CO 4 L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special Tex 3 In the example the class rows subjects and the teacher and room rows show the class names The Settings function can also be used to change the font size the column width and the row v Window in the background show the abbreviated names of the Scheduling dialogue Band mod Classes with student total r What do you want shown in each cell ict vr Class petiod Class e Teacher period Class o Room period Period marker OXx gt Student period Stude
145. ant Periods for which the optimisation tool is unable to find a suitable room will then remain unscheduled Room capacity When room sizes and or class sizes at your school differ widely set the optimisation and the room optimisation tools to consider the capacity of individual rooms in order to prevent situations where a small class occupies a room suitable for twice the number of students or a large class is crammed into a small room designed for a much smaller number of students To ensure the proper functioning of the room capacity function enter the following details see also the chapters Master Data and Lessons Under Master Data Rooms P Capacity Under Master Data Classes gt Students Male Female For couplings under Lessons gt Students Male Female Alternative room chain If you want the room optimisation tool to consider the room capacity of alternative rooms the alternative room ring must remain open i e you need to create an alternative room chain instead Please see the following example R3a__ R2a__ R2b__ Ria__ Rib Cap 22 Cap 25 Cap 29 Cap 35 Cap 39 The example shows that room R3a has a capacity for 22 persons When this room is unavailable the next suitable room for this lesson is the slightly larger room R2a The next room in the chain is the even larger room R2b etc The alternative room for R1a is R1b and the chain ends here because R3a with its lower capacity is
146. are the combination of teacher class subject and room Lessons can take place once or several periods per week Locked periods Periods that have been manually placed on the timetable and locked to prevent the optimisation tool from moving them to a different slot Locking lessons When a certain lesson on a timetable should not be changed by subsequent optimisation runs the lesson can be locked by ticking the relevant box in the master data or lesson window or by selecting the lesson in the scheduling dialogue or on the scheduling timetable Module The standard gp Untis software package can be extended with a number of additional modules offering special functions The following additional modules are currently available Multi Week Timetable Department Timetable Student Timetable Minute Timetable Lesson Planning amp Value Calculation Multiple Terms Timetable Info Timetable and Cover Planning Glossary 309 NTP Non Teaching Period window period non contact hour As arule NTPs are undesirable free periods for teachers and classes scheduled in the middle of a half day Off site location A building of a school is considered off site when it is not possible to walk from the main school building to the off site building in the space of a normal break Off site locations are marked with off site codes and receive special attention by the software Optional subject Lesson periods not attended by all the student
147. as some German Realschulen Austrian teacher training colleges and British secondary schools use a combination of the two extremes described above In these schools some lessons are attended by the entire class core lessons main subjects while others represent so called differentiation subjects intensive lessons minor subjects options that are attended by a fixed group of students from different classes Each student s lessons are therefore determined by the student s choice of main and minor subjects The following section describes how to deal with this timetabling situation using class groups The following example demonstrates the general principles of class groups Class C1 consists of 20 students subdivided into two groups of 10 students each One group consists of students with an interest in modern languages the other of the students with an interest in science All 20 students attend the same lessons for English PE History and Geography However while one group attends Germ an French and Italian lessons the other group has Physics Chemistry and Math instead Class Groups This means that German can be scheduled at the same time as Chemistry or Math since Modern Languages students do not attend Science classes On the other hand German Chemistry and Math must not be scheduled at the same time as English or PE since these are core subjects attended by a the students of the class Solve this problem as follows Unde
148. asses 1a and 1b You can easily verify the information by cross checking the details on the class timetable Time requests Any time requests entered for the lesson or the elements Wednesday ja 2 s js involved in the lesson are highlighted with their appropriate colour code Time requests entered under the master data of a subject are displayed in a separate row The example on the right shows that a time request has been entered for subjects DS and HE Time requests entered under master data or lessons can be L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud deleted directly in the scheduling dialogue by clicking on or by pressing the Delete key Ander DS PL 3a 3b Curie HE HE1 3a 3b 165 166 op Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue ip Scheduling Dialogue ef Dy m alala Ee Monday 0 Wesdy ednesday OoOO O I E E E a 8 l 2 3 m mec Pee i Les 1 o Tea Cer o JE Em be x x Delete day requests Teacher Cer 4 bn Flags markers Cells containing a flag marker x X O amp denote periods already occupied see the example below The different markers have the following meaning O Occupied by the active lesson Example Lesson 11 on Wed 1 and Sat 4 x Occupied by an uncoupled lesson Example The classes involved in lesson 11 have an uncoupled lesson on Fri 1 X Occupied b
149. ata views on p 50 Lesson comparison This function is only active when using different terms i e with the module Term Timetable Lock form view The use of this function is described in detail in the chapter The master data views on p 50 Colour coding Colour coding of lessons No CLTe Per Teacher Subject The button lt Colour coding gt can be used to assign different foreground and background colours to 4 1 HEN S Ander DS Arist PEG Arist MA R Callas Al Nobel RE Cer Arist Callas OF NM Q amp QN 00 0 0 N a a a Arist Callas individual lessons As with the master data the selected colours are displayed on the screen and used by the scheduling tools The selected lesson colour is displayed in the grid view under Periods week Subject room Home Room Male Female Line text 4 Ria Lessons Window 87 Settings Use the Settings button to customise the grid view in the lesson 9 Settings window to suit your personal preferences gt One week this combo box is only active when using the module Multi Week Timetable ST x gt Show inherited codes this option only affects the Codes csse field A more detailed description can be found on p 97 2 iss Font a Cancel Show total select this setting to display a row for total sum below the heading row of the grid view The Show total row shows the sum of individual numerical fields
150. ave a Physics lesson on Monday period 2 while the students of the Languages branch 10a L are scheduled to have Latin The combined name of the class is 10a The screen display shows the names of all class components 10a 10a S 10a L Class 1a Gauss Ria Clase Th rhklesacant Rak 1b 28 gi 10a 10a 10a_L 10a Class 10a SEs E amp E E E E 4 Class 1 Ea Subj Rm Cla JE EH 1 a 8 3562 10a_L The timetable printout contains all the information of the class components on a single timetable for the class 10a B 251 252 gp Untis Standard Package Timetables in HTML Format Timetables in HTML format To make timetables available via the intranet of your school or via the internet you can print out timetables in HTML format Creating timetables in HTML format is similar to creating printouts of timetables Proceed as follows P Activate the timetable you want to save in HTML format and open the dialogue box Print selection by clicking on Print or Print Preview Print selection Llass es 1 7 Selection EMELE g ca 3c xc ifbclas sc xB g cazac XA ifbclas 3c VIIB Bicis 3c vr iclas 3C VIB iclas 3C VIIA dcs ac via Lilt Size 1 KB 1 KB 7 KB 14 KB 1 KB 14 KB 1
151. ax consec periods half day 64 module 309 N name of an element 53 no NTPs 65 NTP non teaching period 309 NTPs for classes weighting 109 min max 64 O O 166 in the scheduling dialogue 166 off site buildings 57 optimisation increase percentage by 129 level 128 scheduling dialogue 182 optimistaion different strategies 132 146 optional subject 110 weighting 110 optional subjects 296 overall diagnosis 144 146 P page setup 248 period availability scheduling dialogue 165 period window tt 220 periods in this subject room 91 periods day min max 64 periods week 88 in the tt selection window 208 periods week min max 69 personnel number 63 predefined layouts 214 previous year s name 58 printing 237 A3 248 all elements 19 all timetables 241 background picture 249 black amp white 233 241 master data 19 master data views 39 number of rows cols per page 246 selected marked tt s 241 timetable L Not in legend 97 R replace teacher scheduling dialogue 185 resize the window 208 room swapping rooms scheduling dialogue 180 room allocation manual 153 scheduling dialogue 160 180 timetable 153 room availability scheduling timetable 157 timetable 148 room capacity 280 room weight 56 S S schedule class group later 96 scheduling period blocks scheduling dialogue 173 scheduling periods in the scheduling dialogue 172 in the scheduling timetable 155 in the timetable 146 scheduling prior
152. ax field 92 gp Untis Standard Package Lesson Properties Warning Scheduling priority At the beginning of an optimisation run gp Untis starts by calculating the level of difficulty for all lessons The more elements are involved and the more restricting the time requests entered for involved elements the more difficult it is for the optimisation tool to place a lesson The gp Untis placement algorithm starts by placing the most difficult lessons first You can change the order of planning priorities by applying planning priority levels permitted range 1 9 Lessons with a low priority level are placed first when there are still many good slots available If you leave this field empty the default priority level of 5 will be used Lessons with priority levels 1 4 take precedence over other lessons while lessons with levels 6 9 are scheduled later This means that lessons with a planning priority of 9 are placed last and lessons with a priority of 1 placed first Entering data in this field has a profound effect on the running processes of the optimisation tool In most cases the overall result will deteriorate Do not use this field lightly and use it only when you have good reason to do so Subj Sequence Classes Teachers Like the master data window the lesson window contains a Subject Sequence field You can enter 1 9 for a positive and A E fora negative subject sequence Please see the chapter User t
153. ayed messages and or rectify the displayed errors and click on OK Room Optimisation Diagnosis CCC Analvsis Overall Diagnosis An accompanying window appears The window consists of three Scheduling Dialogue p anes Scheduling Timetable Delete Ehe Timetable The upper part of the window is the information window containing functions for the management of the optimisation process pause cancel etc Break Supervisions Diagnostic Tools 135 The window also provides a continuous display of key data of the current optimisation run including an evaluation of the current timetable penalty points the number of unscheduled periods window Optimisation Run Stop Optimization Immediately After Timetable After Series Opt type D 20 8 G B 70 0 2 Seres 18 Timetable Mo Placement optim Step 4 Evaluation Unscheduled NTPs 3l x Core Time Infr periods for classes and core time infringements these are periods with a time request of 3 that the software is unable to fill for some reason These data provide a first Current timetable Best TT 1 Timetable No 2 Timetable Mo 3 Timetable No 4 Timetable Mo 5 Timetable Mo 6 Timetable Mo 2138 2138 2 366 2133 2 466 2 472 2 155 2 435 0 4 104 104 110 100 110 104 101 110 7 Timetable Mo B Timetable Mo Q Timetahle Kn 2235 2137 4n 103 33 105 rough impression of the quality of the timeta
154. ber permitted range 0 255 the software calculates the number of units used based on the method described above Alesson with division number 0 does not affect the total number of class periods You can assign the same division number to more than 2 lesson Note rows of a class The software will then use the largest number of periods of these division elements and add it to the total sum Alias name Used to assign an alias name to a lesson Further details can be found in the section Master Data Room Use this function to assign a specific room to a particular lesson When a subject already has a designated specialist subject room that room is adopted automatically when a lesson is created Home Room If you enter lessons via Lessons Classes the home room of the class will be automatically entered If you enter lessons via Lessons Teachers the teacher s home room will be automatically entered Group Lessons Groups Assigned Lesson Groups For use with the Multi Week Timetable module Allows you to enter Additional module a lesson group For further details please see the manual Multi Multiweek Week Timetable amp Term Timetable Timetable 90 gp Untis Standard Package Lesson Properties Additional module Lesson planning io Ste Time range v 1a v 27 Periods week 4 Unscheduled pers TANN n c nna Statistical Code The identical function as for master data Assign any num
155. ber of statistical codes to a lesson The codes are particularly useful in connection with the queries function Subject Group This field displays the subject group to which a subject belongs if assigned The use of subject groups is particularly useful in connection with teacher qualifications qualification to teach a subject and with the syllabus module Lesson Planning Students M Students F Total Enter the number of male and female students participating in the active lesson The sum of the two entries is shown in the Total field These figures are important for room allocation purposes during optimisation and room optimisation Text Ra 59 of Use this field to enter a descriptive text for a lesson The text is displayed in the timetable details window under Special text and can also be displayed in the actual timetable window see example on the left Line text Line text 2 The two fields allow you to enter text for the individual lines of a coupled lesson f Special text L4 Fidelio Lesson Properties 91 The Timetable tab Lessons Timetable Codes Values fia Double periods Min Max f poe From Double periods Min Max Periods in this subject room Block size No consec pers This function allows you to specify the ee Scheduling priority i Subj Sequ Classes permitted or desired number of doub Teacher ptimisation Code E Subj Sequ Teachers le
156. ble by dragging the period away hold down the left mouse button Every period on the timetable suitable for swapping will be highlighted in green and marked with a double arrow Drop the period in a slot of your choice and confirm the move by clicking on Swap Open the file demo gpn and the scheduling timetable O Switch to class 4 O Activate the Math period on Tue 5 by double clicking on the period Drag the period away Lock Ge period Example 157 158 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Timetable The period can be moved without risk of a conflict to any cell highlighted green Fri 5 and Sat 5 The period can be swapped with any period highlighted green and marked with a double arrow Drop the period on the cell Wed 1 GEc and confirm by clicking on Swap SS Scheduling Timetable ki l m 1a Rub DE TE lb Arist MA 2H Callas OE lt ETITCHMHIEIEESSNSS x Lessons 82 Tu 5 gt Whe Other lessons causing a clash SPEC Number of clashing lessons 1 Save with class clash Save with teacher clash Save with room clash Periad swap Possible partner Lessons 5 Swap Save block Cancel he Scheduling Timetable Scheduling periods with conflicts As a rule the gp Untis software assumes that each teacher class and room can only be involved in a single lesson at any one time The software displays a warning whenever you are attempting t
157. ble contains a violation Next are the control elements in the upper part of the selection window Refresh list gt Click this button to start a new diagnosis run This also applies when you close the diagnosis window and carry out a new diagnosis run via Scheduling Diagnosis Data analysis Click this button to carry out a data analysis see the appropriate chapter Minimum weighting 0 4 Items with a weighting below the value you enter in this window are no longer displayed Items categorized as non weightable will still be shown Only show report total gt 0 Tick this box if you want to see only the items where a violation Diagnostic Tools 141 gp Untis Standard Package Diagnostic Tools September 2006 Mon Tue Wed Thu 4 5 B 7 1 12 13 14 15 18 19 E21 22 25 26 27 28 Today 18 0772007 Example Delete the Timetable X r Selection range Do not delete fixed periods Delete ignored periods only Cancel 20709 2001 s has been detected on the timetable Please note that the diagnosis tool only diagnoses the timetable for one week an essential precaution when using the modules Multi Week Timetable or Multiple Terms Timetable where diffe rent timetables may be in use in different consecutive weeks e g for term teaching or block lessons When analyzing such timetables specify by means of the date setting below the control elements
158. ble under construction The tools for a more detailed diagnostic runs are described in the chapter Diagnostics tools below pon SS S m E m BE a A a S m sI Mi M RR oo CH CH DO GR Opt type Di 20 8 Opt type Di 20 8 Opt type Di 20 8 Opt type Di 20 8 Opt type Di 20 8 Opt type Di 20 8 Opt type Di 20 8 Opt type Di 20 8 0000 2 Senes 11 Timetable Mo O O 0 0 2 Senes 12 Timetable Mo 0000 2 Senes 13 Timetable Mo O O 0 0 2 Senes 14 Timetable Mo O O 0 0 2 Senes 15 Timetable Mo 00 070 2 Series 16 Timetable Na The middle part of the window is D D D D 2 Senes 17 Tico Ne i P O O 0 0 2 Senes 18 Timetable Mo used for the display of errors i e lessons that cannot be scheduled and the number of timetables and series the tool has finished optimizing The bottom part of the window is designed to show notes of a general nature When the yellow blue lt OK gt button appears on the screen the optimisation run is complete Note Open a timetable during an optimisation run to watch the timetable construction process in action Diagnostics tools The master and lesson data of your school contain a vast store of information and it is often difficult to keep track of the amount of data This means that it is easy for inaccuracies mistakes and errors to creep in when entering or modifying data Searching for these inaccuracies and errors is
159. bling task and save the window position so you can call it up again at a later point in time inixi Open the Window Groups function via the window Timetable Infoi Info2 LesDistrib Sched Dial Man Sched Standard Fullname menu of the main menu or via the button lt Window Groups gt on the main tool bar This window also allows Timetables Infol Teachers Info2 Classes Lesson distribution Scheduling dialogue Manual scheduling Standard No print out infe Num you to assign individual window groups to one of the 9 Timetable Diagnose buttons on the Window Groups tool bar on C Cl Fe whe PPP epee es Glossary 307 Glossary Alternative room You can define a functionally equivalent alternative room for each room in the school Depending on the weighting settings the software programme can allocate the alternative room instead of the designated lesson room Block period block As a rule gp Untis treats lessons as single periods Several periods of the same lesson scheduled consecutively constitute a lesson block The desired size of the block can be entered under lessons Blocked periods When individual elements are unavailable for scheduling at certain times the periods or half days in question can be blocked with the time request 3 Examples include rooms that are not available at certain times teachers employed at more than one school and vocational col
160. but we would strongly advise against this practice Names are case sensitive i e the software distinguishes between upper and lower case characters It would therefore be possible to assign the name 1a to one class and 1A to another However we would strongly advise against this practice Note Note 53 54 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties Full name surname Enter a longer more descriptive name here This name will appear on printouts This field is optional but recommended Text You can enter an explanatory text for each element Description Descriptions are master data in their own right and also have their own abbreviated and full names Descriptions are useful when the same designation applies to several elements You can specify if you want the abbreviated name full name and or the description to appear on printouts and element views Statistical code You can enter any number of statistical codes separated by a comma per element Among others these marks allow you to create well defined subcategories for your elements Please see the chapter The Queries function on p 36 for further details Check boxes 5 Teachers Tea loj x 2 18 000 Value Marked m Change Ignore i Lock X Don t Print N 7 Time Requests Curie Full name maternal leave starts c Text Eont Description Statistical Code Marked m The box Marked m can be ticked fo
161. button for this function can be found on the tool bar of the master data or lesson window Time requests are graded from 3 completely blocked to 3 core time a period must be scheduled There are two different categories of time requests specified and unspecified time requests Specified time requests refer to specific days and periods Unspecified time requests by contrast are requests where only the duration and the type of request e g 1 day of 3 are specified and where the selection of the day or period is up to the software programme Specified time requests Example gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt Open the master data view for teachers Master Data Teachers and click on Time Requests Zf Time Requests Tea 51 P Switch to teacher New Newton New isaac Newton The window on your screen should now resemble Unspecified day requests the figure on the left The following time requests Requested Days am pm Halve are active la aaa zu Eo Uo MEO Monday and Tuesday periods 7 and 8 2 If aaa possible Newton should not have lessons Unspecified blocks scheduled in these periods o Number of days Period from to p Wednesday all day 3 This means that Wednesday is definitely blocked i e teacher New ton is not available to teach on Wednesdays Thursday pm 3 Newton wants to teach periods 6 8 if possible Time Requests 261 P
162. by clicking on Apply or OK EE Grid Adjustment z Tea Teacher General Print Active Column width Full N EB 495 1185 495 1000 1000 400 400 400 400 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Stat Code s Personnel No Title First name Status LIIKIEYEYPTIEPIPTETRIEI TI OOOOOOOOOOOOOO z Sort Description Descending ERO Ree eee O Oi o Fields Name Print name Room Text Description m Marked 4 Locked i lanored N Do not Statistical C Personnel r Title First name Teacher st LY 3E IEDIE IET YE IE TE TE TE IE The figure on the left shows a grid adjustment dialogue where the options Name Full name Text Description Title First name and Department are active The figure below shows the resulting view Master Data Views 31 7 Teachers Tea A x ValueCorrection Marked m Change Teacher Timetable I Ignore i Lock x g pe Don t Print N V Time Requests Carl Friedrich First name Personnel number p Gauss Full name b Gauss 3 Carl Friedrick D1 Newton i Isaac D1 Hugo Victor Andersen Hans Christiz Aristoteles Callas Maestra Maria D117 Nobel Alfred D117 Rubens Paul D117 Cervantes Miguel Curie maternal leas Cont Madame Marie D117 Cont Individually designed teacher view Moving columns The order of the columns in the grid view can be changed in the same way as in
163. by contrast enables gp Untis to schedule exactly one afternoon period If you come across an undesired or even unnecessary afternoon period in your timetable check the values in this input field For the same reason you should try to keep your options open when it comes to double period conditions and enter 0 1 or 1 2 Locked periods Try not to restrict the optimisation tool by manually scheduling a large number of lessons Reconsider if some periods really need to be scheduled manually see also the chapter Manual timetabling Weightings When the software is unable to schedule large numbers of periods it makes sense to call up the weighting dialogue again and to determine if the setting Extremely important 5 is strictly necessary in all of the cases In order to resolve an input weakness it is often sufficient to reduce the setting of one or two items by one level to very important 4 see also the chapter General notes under Weighting above on p 117 Increase the percentage of the periods to be scheduled until you are certain that all the input weaknesses have been resolved Use the more complex optimisation strategies only when you are certain that all entries are correct An important tool for the identification and location of input errors and violations of conditions are the Diagnosis and Overall Dia gnosis tools These are described in the following chapter Diagnostic Tools Double period condit
164. cally for use in Austrian teacher training colleges British secondary schools Belgian Gymnasiums Master Data Properties 59 60 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties and German Realschulen where students have a choice between several main and minor subject areas core and differentiation lessons or several subject areas of equal standing Please do not enter any data in this field if you are in any way unsure about the exact meaning of the function Please see a more detailed description of class groups on p 272 under User tips Lunch break Min Max This function allows you to specify the maximum and minimum duration of the lunch break for individual classes For lunch breaks of exactly one hour enter 1 1 depending on your time grid If you want gp Untis to schedule a lunch break of at least zero and at most two hours enter 0 2 If lunch breaks are not desirable enter 0 0 and place a tick in the field L Lunch break NTP Periods day Min Max Specify the minimum and maximum number of periods lesson units the class should be taught per day For example enter 4 6 for a class that should have at least 4 periods but no more than 6 periods per day Max Main subject pers day You can specify which subject should be treated as main subjects by ticking M Main subject Use this field to specify how many main subject periods may be taught as a maximum on any one day Max consec Main S
165. ch view has an abbreviated name for purposes of programme es internal identification and a Full name that provides a more detailed Alias Names description of the view School Holidays Deduction grounds Reasons of absence Standard views Display Master Data In the example below there is a tick in the Standard box for the view Cla Class This means that the standard view will be displayed when you call up the menu item Master Data Classes Select a different standard view by ticking the Stan dard box in the row of the element type you wish to display f Display Master Data gS Display Master Data Subject Room Class A Teacher Teacher Subject 4 Subject Room Room Class B Class Teacher B Teacher Subject B Subject Standard Inmenu Type Query Room B Room CJ O Class Corridor v Corridor iw Teacher C Lesson T able Syllat v Lessons tat vi O Subject C Groups v Group vi m Floom m Department Y Departmen Claes Students v Students De
166. cher B Teacher Teacher Teacher 2 Teacher 3 When two or more teacher teams end up sharing a teacher after a swap the increased number of teacher teams means there is a high probability that the teachers will block each other After the swap simultaneous scheduling is not possible Teacher A Teacher B Teacher 2 Teacher 3 List of teacher teams Display or print the list of teacher teams by clicking on the corresponding buttons in the CCC analysis window to have a handy A Print reference of the composition of the teacher teams at your school EC Print Preview Critical element The teacher whose swap would cause the greatest shortening of the chain is referred to as the critical element The CCC analysis displays the abbreviated name of that teacher in the middle part of the window in brackets beside the lesson number 124 gp Untis Standard Package Analysis of Input Data When no critical element is displayed the teachers for this lesson should not be swapped See the given example where teacher Callas is assigned to teach lesson 6 Since four different classes are involved in this lesson it is highly unlikely that a teacher swap would result in a shortening of the chain Per Lessons 27 8 New 10 New 8 New 92 New 4 New 93 New 94 New 90 New 95 New 24 33 Arist 31 Arist 11 75 Arist 73 30 Arist 24 76 Arist 33 Arist 31 Arist 75 Arist 73 53 Rub Take a look
167. cond timetable will always display the same period The example on the following page shows an active timetable comparison The RE lesson is highlighted because it is scheduled for different periods left Wed 6 right Tue 5 3 1a Class 1a Gauss Timetable Ji ux x Ej eo 9s la i 17 3 2007 28 5 2008 26 Pernnds week b Unecheduled pers Basic Level 26 Perads wesk b Unecheduled pers H Timetable comparison Basic Level Only modified m k EN Ma Der MU MA Mu EN oe Re W EN Tea Subj Rm Cla Rub DE 1a Time Stud Special te Rub DE Ria All four periods of German are also highlighted the reason for which is shown in the period details window in the bottom part of the window In contrast to the timetable on the left the timetable on the right shows that a room has been allocated to the lesson The room difference would not be displayed if the setting Without rooms had been activated Below the combo box Timetable comparison you will see another combo box entitled Only modified timetables This function can only be activated when a timetable comparison is active Ticking this box automatically activates the function in both timetables gp Untis proceeds to compare all the timetables of the selected element and displays a message box showing the number of timetables in Timetable Comparison a Classes se 17 9 2007 28 5 2008 Tea Subj Rm Cla 305
168. cs Theory for class 5 to take place Example immediately before the practical Physics lesson in the lab Theory immediately before practical E 1 Curie Physics Practical 5 Practical immediately after theory PL Enter both lessons as a fixed subject sequence see figure below The gp Untis optimisation tool will schedule lesson 98 immediately after lesson 97 You do not have to use the keyboard to enter the lesson numbers involved in a fixed subject sequence Alternatively when you have Tip both the subject sequence window and a lesson window open on the screen double click on the column of the relevant lesson number in the lesson view to include the lesson in the active lesson sequence Z Lesson Sequence TAE Enter lesson numbers for lesson sequences via r Lesson Sequence Lessons double click on the relevant lesson number first 5 Add Remove Hep column in a lesson view Display E Lesson number C Subject C L No Subject amp t E edel xi EF a RFID x v m se CBA ess oa EU Teacher Subject Class es Text Subject roo Home Room Codes P Gauss Physics Theory 5 Theory immediately before practical R5 Z B Curie Physics Practical 5 Practical immediately after theory PL R5 Click Click 101 102 gp Untis Standard Package Lesson Sequences Lesson Sequence lolx Instead of lesson numbers the software can also Lesson Sequence
169. cters was extended to 15 and the font style set to bold Printing 239 Field type Description Short name OK Left aligned v Bold Cancel eee lt i Right aligned Italic Apply Delete field e ns 100 Font size as a percentage 50 500 Centred Underlined x Field type Print individual TT Field type Type of names C Short name Short name Text C Fullname C Name according to Report Settings C Description Department C Class teacher ntis MultiUser 2007 demo Test school DEMO Timetable 2007 2008 j NevtPage Prey Page dwoPage zoomi Close Marked m Ignore i Change Lock Don t Print NJ 7 Time Requests qp Untis2007 Timetable 2007 2008 12 Valid from 10 October Master Data Text Class 4 Nobel Full name Master Data Text Text Description Description 4 Class 4 Master Data Text Department Allows you to include the name of a department in the heading of printed timetables useful when working with department timetables Class teacher Allows you to include the name of the class teacher entered under the master data of a class on printed class timetables 240 gp Untis Standard Package Printing Time range Select the time range you want to display in the heading You can choose between calendar week the time period
170. d adjustment dialogue also reflects Fields the new column order Under Column the field Dept now has the value 4 Tea Teacher 4 Note Alternatively change the column General Print Stat Code s Personnel No Title First name Consec pers Daily Fr Brk Factor Plan w eek JODBDBLDBKIERIKEIEPIDBDIPIPIKRIPIDIKIKI 435 JDODDDmDpmpmpmppmpmppmmpmpmpT Active Column Widtk FullN Sort Desci Descending e CXXXI ONES C oo aS SS SS OIL Oo order by entering the desired position of a column directly under Column in the grid adjustment dialogue Name Print r Roorr Text Desci ro M 4 Le i Ign Nj Di Statis Perso Title First r Teacl Depa NTP Max Daily Value Plan Note The first column of the grid view is reserved for element names and cannot be changed JLIDIEIEIEIE TIE IE JE IDE TE IPTE TE TE YE IE TE zl Sort Example Sorting elements The Master Data View offers three different sorting options 1 Sorting by mouse click on the column heading We have already described this temporary function in the section The All Ele ments window above The function works in exactly the same way for master data views Sorting via the Sort function in the tool bar This method is described in detail in a dedicated chapter on tool bar functions Sorting via the grid adjustment dialogue This option is described in detail below Op
171. ded D Respect double periods For this reason activate code D only in exceptional cases or not at all Excessive use leads to a deterioration of the optimisation results 2 periods week subjects not on consecutive days This weighting applies to lessons with 2 periods per week no double period and is designed to ensure that the two periods are evenly spread throughout the week A high weighting prevents the software from scheduling the two lessons on consecutive days or from scheduling one lesson on the last week day and the other on the first week day 3 periods week subjects not on consecutive days This weighting applies in the same way as the previous one but for 3 periods per week Even distribution of periods of a subject across the day A high weighting ensures that a subject scheduled for Monday period 3 is scheduled for a different period on subsequent days of the week i e not period 3 The following weighting point has the opposite effect Try to place the same lesson at the same time on different days A high weighting ensures that a subject scheduled for Monday period 3 is also scheduled for period 3 on other days of the week The previous weighting point has the opposite effect Large blocks in fringe periods on half days For a variety of reasons it is often desirable to schedule block lessons at the beginning or end of a half day A half day consisting of 6 periods can therefore accommodate 2 blocks
172. details of the first and second coupling row in the timetable period See lesson 73 on User Defined Views 225 Monday period 4 class 1a Click on Resize the window to adjust the window automatically to the new size Layout field If a field is too short to display the entire name e g Callas Thursday period 1 resize the field by clicking on a button on the edge of the field and dragging it to the desired size You can also change the font size for each separate field The example shows how to change the font type of the subject to bold and the font size to 12096 of the preset value Arial 9 7 Layout 01 Period window Contents fields of KE E oem amy tee E Type of Timetable Field type Subject 5 Class TT Students Max characters Teacher TT C3 Room TT jm x Font size as a percentage 50 500 New field Change field F mo Be Delete field Align fields F Lal C Start and end time ar Underlined Window size 124 47 5 Left aligned Scale 3 1 Right aligned Centred Y MU Call Ria Arist MA Arist Ria E i m Nob Ria Arist R1a a Arist Ria Arist Fila E Dib Dia Rub R1a 18 1Te 1Ro 25u ZTe Ro 226 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views Full name Alternatively you can display the full name or the alias name defined under master data The example shows how the full name of the teacher 12 character max can be
173. displayed New field Field type Type of names Class CoS horhname Ey 01 Period window Contents DER Teacher Full name j Use alias ines of Timetable aem RLil name S Pore piste Class TT Students Max characters Teacher TT Special text 4 das al Description oom Teacher Arial 9 0 pm vm as a percentage Lesson group Newfield Change field Change field 100 Si mt j Delete field field Align fields fields Align fields O 2 C Italic E Cluster simultaneous lessons 7 Start and end time C Underlined Window size v 96x 17 Left aligned Cassie Classes ov 17 3 2007 28 6 2008 Scale 21 Right aligned Centred Tr Tr Te mm C iu 1 Teacher xx Hz PEG mENLE 1Su 1 Teacher xx v 3 m cms E PEG Aristoteles No Tea Subj Rm Cla Arist PEG SH2 1a 1b Sport Rub PEB SH1 1a 1b In addition to the class teacher room subject and footnote reference fields the following additional information can be displayed in the period window of a timetable Lesson number Field type Type of names Class Short name C Teacher Full name Displays the unique lesson number as an additional pu Use aias item of information in the timetable Lesson number Footnote reference Special text Description O Time request Lesson group Cluster simultaneous le
174. displayed in the details window is the i code caused by a lesson group m Marked Any lesson can be marked m This is useful for some functions such as printing when the function should be restricted to marked lessons only Lessons Timetable Codes Values Locked i Ignored m Marked E Double pers span breaks 0 Optional subject G No fringe period placement K No altem room to be used k Exempt from data analysis r All prds in the same room Teacher allocation locked f Hugo L Tea B Lock conditionally D Respect double periods Cod es a b C No single periods R Place in a fringe period 5 Schedule class group later 2 Subject more than once day M Variable teacher L Not in legend U p m only double periods M Schedule manually Lessons Timetable Codes Vi e Periods week Huo Teacher E Lesson number 10 Ignore i RE Subject Ps pb Classes Ps1 Display of ignored lessons 94 gp Untis Standard Package Lesson Properties Warning E Double periods are allowed to span breaks Breaks marked with an asterisk in the time grid must not be bridged by double periods Use the code E to deactivate this restriction for specific lessons O Optional subject The optimisation tool treats all lessons marked O as if a non compulsory subj
175. e Nobel RE R1a T 1a Time range xd Classtes 17 3 2007 30 6 2008 mena Subj Rm Stud Special text Nobel RE R1a 172 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue S Keep the 2 current lesson Example As you can see the scheduling dialogue always displays the active lesson If you want to suppress this behaviour and freeze the scheduling dialogue display click on Keep the source lesson Click ondifferent lessons in the scheduling dialogue The lesson window and the timetable now display the same active lesson and they stay in the front while the scheduling dialogue window remains in the background Scheduling periods Schedule periods using one of the following options gt By double clicking on a period gt By clicking on the button Schedule the period qh gt By pressing the Insert key Via the context menu right mouse button See the chapter Deleting period blocks on p 175 for details gt Via Drag amp Drop from the list of unscheduled periods see the chapter Scheduling periods with clashes on p 159 or from the lesson view see the chapter Scheduling periods on p 148 to the period details window gt By pressing x on the keyboard and then Enters Open the file demo gpn and the scheduling dialogue The Unscheduled tab displays all unscheduled lessons Activate lesson 30 Subject Math Teacher Arist Class 1b
176. e master data views Deleting elements Use this function to delete the active element Delete a selection of elements by using the shortcut keys Ctrl X Serial Change This function allows you to replace the contents of a field in all the rows of the grid view with a single mouse click Enter the old value you wish to change in the field Current Content in the Serial change dialogue and the new value in the field New Content When you click on OK the changes are applied to the selected range The selected range usually contains all the elements of the view Tick the control field Whole File to extend the selection range to all the elements of the school By contrast tick the box Selection Only if you only want to replace the elements previously selected with the mouse gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt Open the view Master Data Rooms and place the cursor in the row of room R3a under Alternative Room gt Click on Serial change This will open the Serial change dialogue The input field Current Content already contains the suggested item Ria gt Enter R2a in the field New Content and click on OK Master Data Views 47 Grid FF Adjustment D New Delete zu Serial Change Example 48 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views f Rooms Roo E Rin WW Serial Change x Namel Full name Altern room T Sports Hall 1 SH2 E S
177. eccssnaeessseccsanaueseeecssanauseeecssanaucesseessasaaeseees 111 Hc Id MT E E A E EE 113 The Period Distribution tab eeeissseessssssseses seen a nns 114 The Time Requests tab M R H 116 OTF IOUS CMM 117 hir SIS OF DUN d la EE TC EE E 119 GPG SIS 119 Me CCC WNOOW X 121 POT P e A E E E S 122 Bee SIS ets dita E E E E S a EEE EE E E 125 ODUMI SON ean 127 Control data for optimisation sso epa Eau Danse p Pac etaed nio tege vean sas 127 DUIS QUOT OCC SS aissis iir a Sea E E e a e R 127 Teacher assignment during optimisation eeessssssessseeee nennen 130 C2 210 PNE TETTE TE ETE ETT 132 Strategy A Calculate a series of n timetables seeeeeessssseeeees 132 Strategy B Several series eiiisssssssssse eese eene nnn nana anni nnns snas 183 Strategy C Percentage planning scccccccccccsssssseseeceeeeccesseessueaseeseeceeeseeeaans 133 Strategy D Percentage planning in several series ccccsesseeceeeseteseeeeseeenees 134 THE ACCOM Pay ING WINGOW 134 TACOS CS COONS acca cones 135 Percentage Ol AMVIRG rtc M MH 136 PIANOS CRT 140 The selection WINDOW usce oi eru rhe XE Ee uam tan census o at bc madens n pant enu 140 5 6 gp Untis Standard Package Contents The detail
178. ecouple individual coupled lessons n Extended and create single lessons with their own lesson numbers instead de coupling If you want to decouple all the RR TT x components including the class Old lesson L No 6 Per 1 New lessons couplings and skip the inter Tece Subiect Ea mediate step via the decoupling e window hold down the Ctrl key 2a 2b 3a i i i 2a 2b 3a while simultaneously clicking on 2a 2b 3a Extended de coupling i Y Split up all Cancel Teacher suggestion Teacher suggestion This button is only active when using the module Lesson Planning A detailed description of this function can be found in the Lesson Planning manual 86 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window e Time requests Time requests Please see the chapter Time requests under User tips for furt her details on this function The time request 3 core time i e a lesson must be HH K 2 2 a scheduled at this time is deactivated greyed out since this Show fields ia with content Lesson e comparison particular option is managed more efficiently by the much more suitable scheduling dialogue and scheduling timetable tools The section Manual Timetabling describes how to use the scheduling tools to lock lessons to ensure that a specific lesson takes place at a specific time Show all fields with content A detailed description of this function can be found in the chapter The master d
179. ect rooms and home rooms and how and why the optimisation software assigns a particular room to a lesson Alternative rooms Since rooms are usually a scarce resource when it comes to timetable construction gp Untis provides the additional option of assigning an alternative room Alternative rooms are equivalent to the home room in size and function During optimisation gp Untis can therefore allocate an alternative room instead of the desired home room It is the subsequent Room optimisation function that is responsible for allocating the desired room to a lesson if possible Alternative room ring Since each alternative room can have its own alternative room you iBi x Patel Dlx ee Sule a Wy R3a R1b Name Full name IAEE Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room za Class Room 2b R2b R2a Class Room 3a Ge can create entire alternative room rings by entering the original home room as the alternative room of the last alternative room in the chain The example below shows such an alternative room ring gp Untis can allocate either one of the 5 rooms depending on which would improve the optimisation results most Both the optimisation and the room optimisation tools take into consideration the order in which the rooms are entered an important criteria in the following two scenarios You can either recreate geographic aspects of your school by ensuring that the alternative room order reflects the relat
180. ect was involved For further details please see the chapter Fringe period and optional subjects under User tips on p 296 G No fringe period placement Activate this code if a particular lesson should not be scheduled in a fringe period For further details please see the chapter Fringe period and optional subjects under User tips on p 296 K No altern room to be used Lessons marked K must only be scheduled in the designated lesson room The use of alternative rooms is not permitted k Exempt from data analysis The code k is used to exclude a lesson from the automated data analysis function Activate this function only when you have made sure that the lesson in question will not obstruct the optimisation tool r All prds in the same room All lesson periods marked r take place in the same room This code has a major influence on the room optimisation function since the r code is powerful enough to displace a class from its home room Please read the chapter Room logic under User tips on p 278 for further details before attempting to use this function Teacher allocation locked The teacher assigned to teach a class can be locked separately for each coupling line to ensure that the placement cannot be changed by the automated teacher allocation function only for use with the module Lesson Planning and Value Calculation See also the chapter Optimisation under Timetable optimisation on p 130
181. ed it will not be possible to start the optimisation until the errors are resolved Messages highlighting warnings appear for a number of different reasons They may refer to settings you have selected on purpose such as couplings They could also indicate input weaknesses or errors that could lead to a violation of your settings Please see the following example on pg 126 amni v Do not show again until next optimisation Analysis of Input Data essons oz Teacher without a room Teacher Gauss Teacher without a room Teacher Cer Note Data analysis E E Cancel The same room is entered for TWO teachers Teacher Gauss Room PL Subject once a day not possible too many single double periods required Subject once a day not possible too many single double periods required 125 126 gp Untis Standard Package Analysis of Input Data Example Your school has lessons on 6 days of the week The EN lesson is down for 7 periods per week without double periods gp Untis will attempt to schedule this lesson as single periods which however is impossible without violating the condition that the subject should only be taught once a day LL Data analysis Subject ance a day not possible too mary single dauble periods required i Lessons 33 EM 1a The data analysis message can be interpreted in two different ways Either the 7 periods per week are an input error possibly a typo
182. ed range on the Selection range tab under Timetable Settings You have a choice between calendar week total school year and any specific date range you have entered see the following example When selecting Calendar week a date range window appears where you can specify which week you want to display Timetable comparison HU TTE Individual timetable with days across the top Window Set Up 207 f 3a Class 3a Aristoteles Ti The two selection boxes Time siiis eut su alid Ed Do OY table comparison and Only im Re Sane Clases v 17 9 2007 28 6 200 modified timetables are for use em iM fra Iw Fri FR with the Timetable com E ins z BIET m parison function described in VTL v 23 9 2007 w JO Calendar week BH m greater detail in the chapter Timetable comparison on p 301 Monday 1 School week 38 Calendar week Cancel e Total school year gay Sunday 38 Calendar week 1 School week E September 2007 EI DE Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri J 429 5b 10 11 12 13 17 18 13 20 24 25 26 27 Apply Today 18 07 2007 Master data text Displays the text entered under Text in the master data of the displayed element Description Displays the description entered for teachers under Master Data Descriptions in the details window of the timetable Teachers Tea Description NTPs Cont Cont
183. ed arrows mark the swap option on the timetable In the example they show that the Math lesson would be moved to Mon 1 the History lesson to Sat 1 and the GEc lesson to Mon 5 The teacher timetables show the corresponding period swap for the teachers involved in the lessons The swap positions in the timetable window of the scheduling dialogue are marked A B and C Click on Swap to confirm the swap Unecheduled Infomation Hirig Chained respa Placed Taget Dit Ph Fuss Daun Pivari CETERI Mo T a Subj Rm Cla Tee Stud Specialtedt Cluster Onsa MA Ria 3a O EN Im n E E eS okn oN lg cr t a ig LEE PEHE 2 FEE FER la gt ao i wm uu m 75 m E A a E Es EK T The Scheduling Dialogue 193 In practice you may want to move a lesson to a different slot on the timetable already occupied by another lesson This lesson would be displaced and would have to be moved to yet another slot The same swap rules apply to the second lesson either the software finds a suitable slot for the lesson on the timetable or the lesson will displace yet another lesson This chain of events will continue until a suitable slot has been found for every lesson gp Untis supports this intuitive planning method with the functions Consecutive swaps and Chained swaps The main difference between the two swap functions is that consecutive swaps can be carried out using Drag amp Drop and
184. ed in different lessons two lessons would be displaced and the chain would be disrupted Drop the PE lesson still holding down the Ctrl key on Thu 5 This slot is blocked by lesson 2 Callas AR 1b You will not be asked if you want to create a conflict The PE lesson will now be scheduled in this position and lesson 2 the lesson originally placed in this slot automatically becomes The Scheduling Dialogue 195 the active lesson Drag this lesson to another position marked and drop it thereby continuing the chain or alternatively place the lesson on a suitable unoccupied slot A suitable slot for this lesson is Sat 1 where lesson 2 can be scheduled without causing a conflict as indicated by the 1 symbol This completes the swap chain Friday Saturday Wednesday Thursday xs fe adusque amp b h k b js le y la I2 3 4 s Ka EH EX le eem x x rm EE E x 3 x i x b The PE lesson has now been moved from Fri 8 without requiring the de scheduling of another lesson Slots marked with the symbol SI when a period is dragged away denote positions where a period swap is possible The symbol signals that a period can be scheduled in this position without displacing another lesson The lower the value in the symbol the better the position for scheduling the period 196 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Example Please note that consecutive swaps may be carr
185. eld descriptt 30 0 Periods week T E fia esson windows Ignore upper lower cas gt Lesson number JV Element field above less nr v Dynamic details window Element Rollup Auto size for the details window IV Activate double click Ignore room and text when combinging IV Update elements coupling lines Lesson number umm ud a Class 1a Gauss 30 0 Periods week Lessons Window 73 74 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window Since one row may not offer sufficient soace for the display of all the details of coupled lessons these are displayed in greater detail in the details window gt Activate lesson 7 using the previous example The second column of the grid view shows that the lesson is a coupled lesson involving two classes and three teachers 2 3 The grid view however only displays the name of teacher Ander and the class 1a Callan halt Full details are provided in the lessons details window instead The details window displays one row per teacher involved in the coupled lesson and contains complete details on subject class and classroom for each teacher Teacher Subject Class es Subject Home Room Male Lesson details in 1 PEE la PL e 2 Gaus DS 1b PL the Lesson details Bafe x ab a window eet Predefined views Rla Rla Access the l
186. ement of abbrev Gruber amp Petters Software g Number of columns Print frames Cancel Details overview timetables The following print options are available for overview timetable formats 11 20 and 30 Number of rows columns per page This option allows you to specify the number of rows and columns to be printed on one page The example on the following page shows an overview timetable for the room availability for teachers The page contains 11 rows and 40 columns Legend The printed versions of overview timetables can also include a le gend containing the details for which there is insufficient space in the timetable periods The legend of overview timetables is always printed on a separate page Intermediate headings Overview timetables can contain a large amount of data For purposes of clarity the row and column headings can be repeated at regular intervals In the example above the abbreviated names of teachers are repeated in every 24th column Print details x Weeks headings Layout 11 Number of rows columns per page E 1 Rows weekly periods per page 40 Columns week per page Coupling legend footnote Legend 1 page per element 2 Number of columns Intermediate headings o After each n th line 24 After each m th column Heading prior to the following elements Entry similar to 2a 5a 7a Came Printing 247 248 gp Untis Standard Package
187. en the grid adjustment dialogue of the view Tea A from the previous example Enter the figure 1 in the row Full Name under Sort and click on Apply The teacher master data appear in alphabetical order sorted by full name You can even combine a number of different sorting symbols in the grid adjustment dialogue P First enter the number 1 in the row Description under Sort and then the number 2 in the row Full Name Click on OK The data will be sorted primarily by description and within the category Description by full name see example Per default setting the data is always sorted in ascending order E Grid Adjustment Fields C uey Tea Teacher Ander Hans Christian Andersen Arist Aristotle Callas Maestra Maria Callas Cer Miquel Cervantes Hugo Victor Hugo Nobel Alfred Nobel Rub Paul Rubens m You can change this setting by selecting Sort in descending order in the grid adjustment dialogue This option is only available when a number has been entered in the corresponding row under Sort ValueCorrection Subs General Print Field Active Column Width Full Nam Sort Description Desc Name 2 495 L Name BBCTTSTIIRALTS Full name 3 1188 Print na ROE E A f Room 4 495 O Ww Room Eel de K Bs 2l B t d im Re e 2 ba 4 Al Gauss 2 2346Vaue escription escrip
188. en this function by clicking on the lt Suggested swaps gt button in the scheduling dialogue Any period swaps you make can be undone via the lt Undo gt button in the History tab Open the file demo gpn call up the scheduling dialogue and open a class and a teacher timetable O Select the class timetable for the class 3a and click on Mon 5 You want to move the Math lesson of class 3a lesson 1 on Monday period 5 to an earlier slot if possible As you can see in the scheduling dialogue only Fri 5 and Sat 5 are available slots for moving Consequently the move would decrease the quality of the timetable Place the cursor on Mon 5 in the scheduling dialogue and click on Suggested swaps gp Untis now offers three different options see example on the following page a Display of all 2 way swaps swaps involving 2 swap partners b Display of all 3 way swaps swaps involving 3 swap partners C Display of all 2 way and 3 way swaps Suggested T swaps Example 191 192 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Per default the software displays 2 way and 3 way swaps The swap suggestion window now displays a list of all possible 2 way and 3 way swaps sorted by quality best swap option first Swap suggestions highlighted in green denote options that would improve the timetable Suggestions shaded red denote a decrease in timetable quality Click on the first swap suggestion H
189. entered under Master Data Classes for minimum maximum length of lunch break Respect class sequence Classes Controls the level of compliance with the subject sequence codes specified under Lesson Classes or Master Data Subjects 110 ap Untis Standard Package Weighting Rooms Period Distribution Time Requests Analysis T h e v S u bj e ct S W t a b Teachers Teachers Classes Subjects Main Subjects SEHE pula iust TTE Use the following weighting settings to tional subjects in the last period of the ays r F LL Es us control the level of compliance with the specifications entered for fringe periods SE Opt subjects in the 1st or last period of the half days UST CT es rs IU Cut eM Lr Fringe periods in the last period of the half days and optional subjects These subjects ee as Fringe periods in the 1st or last period of the half days are defined on the Subjects tab under ia ER Lesson not to be held in fringe period if code G Master Data Subjects code F Fringe period or O Optional subject Subjects Tab Fringe periods and optional subjects are usually lessons not attended by all the students of a class To avoid NTPs for the rest of the students these subjects should preferentially be scheduled at the beginning or the end of a half day Code G Not a fringe period has the opposite effect A subject marked G should preferentially be scheduled in the middle o
190. ents r Time range From To Note 2 Male Female These fields allow you to enter the number Dept Class teacher Class Tab of male and female students pupils in a Alias name class The two figures are added up Lessons table automatically and displayed below the Previous year s name in put fields Class level These figures are only important for use Regular school with the room capacity function For furt her details on the room capacity function please see the chapter Room capacity on p 280 under User tips Class teacher This field has no direct influence on any of the gp Untis functions but can be used for printing timetables for display in the heading and for some database links File Import Export Alias second name For certain purposes it may be desirable to use standardized designations instead of the usual names Examples include printouts for local authorities and data exports to databases Alias names can also be assigned to groups of classes e g Sabc for 3a 3b 3c Alias names can be entered via the relevant element or under Master Data Alias Names Lesson Table The lesson table is a useful tool for checking subject distribution in the module Lesson Planning and Value Calculation The function can only be used in connection with that module Previous year s name The class name from the previous year is required for use
191. enu i e which timetables you want to have immediately available see figure on the right Per default setting timetables labelled big and overview are automatically included in the menu see figure on the top right EU Display Timetables i ojx ciat Class 1 Hoom suelalick Subject Teacher 1 Class schedule big Overview classes Overview rooms Overview teachers Room schedule big Te schedule big Class 1 Class 1 Class 1 Class 1 Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 Class 10 Class 11 214 gp Untis Standard Package Timetable Layouts Y Display Timetables lolxi Predefined layouts HEE Per default the Timetable List All Views list P ciat Help ei Bu displays the predefined layouts for all the diffe pr a e j renttypes of timetable If preferred you can limit Eu we d ie the view to individual elements class teachers d Students g etc es schedule big O Claz0 Overview classes Ed ru e L1 A The names of the predefined layouts obey the lal C Class 1 L Ea en F E following rules Cla 1 Class 1 O O lato Class 10 O Class 10 5 Key words e g Cla1A Class 10 O i go dcm a B Timetable designations containing the key word sed 5 Cla are class timetables Roo are room B das 1 W W W ClallB Class 11 Oo L1 timetables Tea teacher timetables Sub Lla11C Llass 11 L O s subject timetables a
192. er details such as the start and end date of the school year country region and type of school The details entered in this window are required for a number of different ms statistical processes and calculation methods Test school DEMO Em County For demo and test only x Regen The Overview tab provides an overview of the R To Zo number of classes teachers rooms and lessons 2327x gt at your school General Overview Values r School year fi A Weekly Periodicity Activate daily time arid C a e n d a r Cancel Apply Help The calendar can be used to enter details such as free periods on a specific day 258 gp Untis Standard Package Settings Miscellaneous Settings The Auto save tab Use this tab to specify the time interval between automatic HTML E Mail data saves and how many backup generations you want the Autosave Diesoies Timetable Software to archive The settings in the example show for 4 No of auto save generations instance that gp Untis saves data every 30 minutes and 30 Auto save interval minutes creates four backup generations The software saves the data Save only when the data has been changed in the files Save1 gon Save2 gpn Save3 gonand Save4 gpn V Open with the last file used with the most up to date data saved in the file Savef gpn and the oldest data in the file Save4 gpn When the option Open with the last
193. ereshutssivetesu e eretn ey eris tve dese rertusa ed oder cetus 184 Replacing teachers RETE MM 185 Brev Eillaere Ner r 187 Displaying all teachers of a class sessi essen 187 Displaying all classes teachers and rooms essere 187 Displaying a second lesson aseecsiened Mpuad actaintuudalofonii A Fen ad rca RM Ux NN Ro ad Kad 187 B CciOpeE m 187 Displaying lesson colour codes sssscccccccssseesecessnsaeseeeessaunsseeesssaansssessaaaaanses 188 V gocm c E 188 Displaying arbitrary elements sssexsssesmuevexicansxpasasdo Eure tteyd ri Ren aRRd IE Rite Ya rins 188 SS MOMC HI ROY E Ir 189 SWapping or id elo RR EE E TE ETE 190 SWap SUGGESTIONS esce etii quesos tatit aia ime ssan aE caa amandi cute esta AE tuse crines 191 Consecutive SWAPS sssrinin uinen hn tur su urEEU EN bvo PEE Sex aeaii 193 TAINS SWAPS PNE ET 196 Scheduling half periods 1 eere eeceeee ees 199 Scheduling half periods using the timetable ssssessusse 200 Scheduling half periods using the scheduling dialogue 200 Manually scheduling half periods cccccsseeecceeseeeeeeececeeeeeeeseseeeeaesessaaes 203 TIMETABLE DISPLAY eere tnns 205 dinero SQUID c 205 Selection windOw seeessss
194. ering coupled lessons coupled teachers When more than one teacher is involved in a lesson the teachers are referred to as coupled teachers P Activate the modified lesson 96 from the previous example New 3b 3a EN P Enter Curie under Teachers in the second row of the details window and press Tab Tf 18 gp Untis Standard Package Lessons Window Class 3b Callas L Cla L No ere 7a 21 43 22 2 Cals AR 3a 3b R3a Ek PEG SH2 R3a I 3 2 R3a Erb Psi Gym Pz1 Ps Ps Ps Nobel ae 3b Pst ler Al 3b P Curie 3b DE P Ps ab 3a ab 3a 14 Ini xi 3 xU rnm e BESIDE sre ole OE Per Teacher Subject Clasates Subject rao Home Room Double Block 1 Ander 1H Sb PL Rib dd Er You have assigned the teacher Curie to lesson 96 Now enter data in the remaining fields in this row in the lesson details window e g French FR this element must first be created 3a and 3b and R3a the desired classroom gp Untis now interprets the lesson as follows Teacher Newton teaches the subject English to students from both classes 3a and 3b for one period per week while teacher Curie teaches the subject French to the remaining students of classes 3a and 3b at the same time Using the method described above you can create couplings of Please note the following coupling rules gt Always use one row per teacher in the lesson details window gt In eac
195. eriod details window synchronizes all other open timetables of the same element zini xi Communication with other Marked m Ignore i Lock X Don t Print N Class 3a Aristoteles ame Full name Ni 1a Class 1a Gauss 1b 2a Class 4 Nobel windows Time range i 17 8 2007 30 6 2008 Open a class timetable and the master data window for classes Click on a class in the master data window and you will see that the timetable automatically switches to the timetable of that class The same occurs when you switch elements in a lesson Rub HI R3a window or in the element rollup r Element Rollup Customise under Settings Activate double click n v Update elements Miscellaneous 3a Locking timetable types In the previous examples the type of timetable was always locked Open the file demo gpn Open a teacher timetable and the window All Elements In the master data view click on one teacher after another The timetable window always shows the timetable of the currently selected teacher Clicking on a class name however has no effect on the timetable view i e the type of timetable here the teacher timetable remains unchanged Unlocked timetables Deactivate the type locking function by clicking on lt Lock Type gt Switch between teachers classes and rooms in the All Elements
196. ersion Timetable construction You can then simply switch between the two versions by clicking on the appropriate button see following example gt Under Customise prepare the window for printing by ticking the options you require All Elements 17 Er a Settings Example X Sports Hall 1 Renovation in September Sports Hall 2 Gymnasium Physics lab Chemistry lab Home Econ room Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room 2a Class Room 2b Class Room 3a Pseudo Room 1 3b Pseudo Room 2 4 BISHI GEES Gwm DP SEE HEA Ria Rib hes R2b R3a Psi fea Ek Customise the view V Full name _ Altern room V Text _ Description __ Marked m Lock X C Don t Print N C Stat Code s Dept Rm Weight Off site codes v Capacity Corridor Corridor 18 gp Untis Standard Package All Elements gt Click on Settings Settings 0x ta in Settings The Settings dialogue appears where you can save your current settings E Save As gt Click on Save As P Save the settings under an appropriate name such as Printed list gt Close the Settings dialogue box by cE x clicking on lt OK gt K a ry gt Adapt the window for work on the timetable DefaultLight by displaying the additional columns you require for example via the lt Customise gt function SS Master Dat
197. es it so that you can schedule it in a different slot straight away Alternatively use the shortcut keys Ctrl X 176 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Schedule periods with clashes Scheduling periods with clashes allows you to schedule a lesson for a slot on the timetable already occupied by another lesson This is a useful function especially when scheduling subjects attended by some but not all of the students of a class Class clashes Example Open the file Demo2 gpn and the scheduling dialogue O Activate lesson 70 in the list of unscheduled periods You wantthe TX lesson to take place at the same time as the DS class on Fri 3 Place the cursor on Fri 3 As you can see in the period details window teacher Curie and the room CL are available but class 1b already has another lesson 78 scheduled in this slot 35 Scheduling Dialogue EN 1nl xl Lessons pn Unscheduled History Chained swaps 208 200E Periods 34 30 5 2007 Hugo I Arist Allunsched period Callas 1 1b X Arist MA 2 1h Rub DE Cer Curie Wednesde per Friday edh ledis eh sd pi pp s r nm Ew ocho MEME c BERNGS Tea Curie oun M Tea Cures Rm CL Ak 1a SET ls eel L Na Tea Subj Rm SE Stud Special text Cluster Curie TX CL 1b 70 Ander DS PL 1b The Scheduling Dialogue 177 In order to schedule the lesson with a class clash en
198. esson view dialogue via the menu item Lessons Dis play Lessons ome z 3 Display Lessons Full name Class Teacher Subject All A Class A Teacher Subject E Teachers alues L Non sched Non scheduled periods Standard In menu Type vi e Class Teacher Subject Teacher Class Teacher Subject Teacher Teacher Query 1 OKOLI JOOOOQOUORRE KOL Much like the master data views the lesson views offer standard views and a queries function The view L All deserves particular mention Per default setting this view shows a complete listing of all the lessons entered for your school Lessons Window Printing The print function in the lesson views works in exactly the same way as the print function in the master data views Thelesson views offer the following additional settings relevant only for lesson views These can be accessed via Details under Print selection P Select 1 Page Elementif you wantthelessonsofdiffe EX x rent elements teachers or classes to be printed on I 1 Page Element separate pages Balance Plan Actual Lessons of the element gt Tick the option Balance Plan Actual if you want tO fF Deductions include balance data on an additional row on printouts P The option Lessons of the element suppresses the Cancel printout of rows not relevant for the active element of coupled lessons Gauss Gauss
199. essssssesseeeee nennen nennen nnns nass 206 Timetable WOO eceeee ie edad iiedartie ioco ri etie ae ibovuartem Pisemdeesdubut iet cures 208 Period details WINKOW cccccccceccceeececeeceeceeceseeceeseeeeseeeseeeeessueeesaueessaeeeas 210 Timetable interaction usura eoruni oda uoo ecus s e oin USE vs Y ceo vv Oa S ran E EE rna IVa SR 211 Buche cm t G 213 Predefined layouts ccc T 214 8 gp Untis Standard Package Contents User defined VIEWS escena kzevuykueads yoad anu un iE egaaiErxa ved U TEPEEV i rwY va dae NV YR dX 219 New TIMGTADIC VIEW aasusszsetatzssEUchu unies t opetesseeu EEE n E iUt oNu PU U US ds 219 Timetable period window 1 sees 220 AY OUT rr M 229 C VOUT saa a 230 Sono MOI Iy S arenen era a A EE EEE E SE E Ua PE DE LEE 234 FOR aae E E E E E E EEEE 234 COOU OUG S annae E T TA E E AE 235 Column headings acetic areorsca scr nvisesrmarc nn Suapb tet secedag aesedaeas ein entaianmaetavielnannpeadsaanteneat 235 KON PS ING MENT TOTO 236 ialsiiljro em 237 wong MM Y R 23 mole 23 7 UA OUI E dy E E N E EE E dial conte E 240 Selecting timetables eee cccccseseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeseegeeeeesaaeseees 241 Details individual timetables
200. evious example by clicking on Master Data Display Master Data L New P Place the cursor in the row Tea B Teacher B and click on New The screen displays a dialogue window where you can EC rename the view e g TeDpt Teachers department wise Teachers department wise Full name CON Of course you can also adopt the suggested name Tea 31 Teacher 31 and rename the view later After clicking OK the new view appears in the option list Grid gt Activate the new view by clicking on it and click on Grid E Adjustment Adjustment gt Deactivate all the fields with the exception of Name Full Name and Department gt Sort primarily by department Sort 1 and 7 Display Master Data Master Data Views PISTES 35 then by full name Sort 2 and click on lt OK gt Open the new view by clicking on lt Show View gt or by double clicking on the full name gt Now you have access to a list of teachers sorted by departments 5 Teachers TeDpt E ni x EE Dx es eur Name Fulname Dep BE gt Andersen Arist Aristoteles m Cer Cervantes Including new views in the menu You can include the new view directly in the menu Mas ter Data This has the advantage that you can access the window directly via this menu and can bypass the longer route via the Display Master Data list gt Open the Display Master Data window via menu
201. f a half day Optional subjects only in the last period of the half days Controls the scheduling of subjects marked Optional subject in the last periods of a half day Opt subjects in the 1st or last period of the half days Controls the scheduling of subjects marked Optional subject in the first or last periods of a half day Fringe periods in the last period of the half days Controls the scheduling of subjects marked Fringe period in the last periods of a half day Fringe periods in the 1st or last period of the half days Controls the scheduling of subjects marked Fringe period in the first or last periods of a half day Lesson not to be held in fringe period is code G Controls the scheduling of subjects marked C in the middle periods of a half day The only differences between optional subjects and fringe period subjects are the different weighting settings specified by the timetabler You have two subjects Choir and Clarinet both of which are attended by some of the students of the class The subject Choir can take place either at the beginning or the end of a half day but you want the subject Clarinet to take place exclusively at the end of the day Meet both requirements by entering the code O for Choir and the code F for Clarinet and set the weightings accordingly If you want the subject Choir to be scheduled exclusively at the beginning of a half day simply block the last periods of
202. figure on the left Copy the lessons to the clipboard e g via Ctrl C Switch to the active element 1c There are no lessons scheduled mx yet for the newly created class 1c ecm GEc 1a 1b 2a 2b Fila Lessons Window 99 P Place the cursor in the grid view and select Paste from the 4 clipboard e g Ctrl V EH CI Te Per_ Teacher Subject Class es Subject roo Home Room Double per Block The lessons of class 1a will be copied from the clipboard to the lesson view of class 1c Classfes Subjec Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Coc Line value Linetext 2 iol xl gt 3 5 5 2 2 2 5 2 Teache Subjec Classfes Subjec Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Coc Line value Linetext 2 Eme 1c 1b 2a 2b Edit Master Data Less Paste Special Cut Copy In addition to the normal Paste function you have access to the Paste function Paste Special in the Edit menu This function allows you to paste not only the lessons but the timetable of the copied ee as emen lessons i e the class timetable will also be copied Presos EERE Nest Element Data export to external programmes 8 Gauss L Tea 210 xd Lessons Timetab 2 Periads vn d gt The clipboard can also be used to export data to external programmes e g spread sheets or word processing WE programmes gt
203. file used is active gp Untis automatically opens the file last edited when the programme starts up Suppress this behaviour by pressing the Shift key during start up The option Start with the current date allows you to specify if windows containing date selection options should display the current date or the date when the file was last saved Miscellaneous Settings HTML E Mail Multiple Te Auto save Directories Timetable Customise Type of file NER MCCAIN Data files gpn C Program Filessgp Untis Version 14 x files apu Back up files C Program Files gp Untis S ave Optimisation results ii C Program Files gp Untis Work Import E xport HTML files CM nfoNHTML Department files C Program Files gp Untis D epartment E Mail attachments Delete The Directories tab This tab allows you to specify various standard paths We would recommend that you create your own directories for your backup and work files i e the files containing the different timetables of your school saved during optimisation and enter the paths on this tab Settings 259 The Timetable tab The settings on this tab are relevant for a number of different timetable functions For instance the timetable KENMM M xi version number you can assign HTML E Mail Multiple Terms Autolnfo to each timetable version will be Auto save Di
204. fringe period subject The attribute ensures that lessons of this subject are scheduled preferentially at the beginning or the end of a school day or half day Please see further details in the chapter Free period and fringe period subjects on p 296 under User tips O Optional subject This option allows you to categorize a subject as an optional non compulsory subject This means that lessons of this subject are scheduled preferentially at the beginning or the end of a school day or half day Please see further details in the chapter Free period and fringe period subjects on p 296 under User tips 2 More than once a day This option should only be used in special circumstances When this option is active the optimisation algorithm can schedule the subject in irregular intervals and even several times a day Ticking this option deactivates the weighting settings for The same subject cannot be taught more than once on the same day and Avoid errors with double periods G Not in a fringe period Selecting this option causes the software to schedule lessons of this subject preferentially in the middle of a half day avoiding fringe periods D Respect double periods This option should only be activated in extreme circumstances Please read the section Lessons before selecting this option This function ensures that the automated optimisation tool will always schedule the number of permitted or desirable double pe
205. g timetable or in the scheduling dialogue is logged on the History tab and can be undone via the Undo button Clicking on Delete will delete all the planning steps shown in the list Lessons m Unscheduled Information History Chained swaps Delete 20 3 2007 30 6 2008 Allocating rooms Open the room allocation function in the scheduling dialogue via the button Allocate Delete room on the context menu accessible via right mouse click or by pressing Ctrl R Please see the chapter Allocating rooms under Scheduling timetable on p 160 for furt her details on the room allocation function When the cursor is placed in the room row under the active lesson and you click on the Allocate Delete this room button the already allocated room is deleted immediately and replaced with the designated lesson room Room swap Carry out room swaps between rooms of two coupled or uncoupled lessons by using Drag amp Drop gt Open the file demo gpn and activate lesson 33 gt Show the room availability for room R1b by entering the abbreviated name of the room in the last empty row of the scheduling dialogue see also the chapter Displaying elements on p 188 he Scheduling Dialogue gt Drag the marker of R1a to the row of room R1b in the same column and drop it The two rooms will now be swapped When the room is unoccupied the room will not be swapped but simply moved For this function
206. ge The Scheduling Dialogue Displaying lesson colour codes ux Show lesson The colours defined for master data elements and individual lessons M colours can be activated and deactivated via the button Show lesson colours g Scheduling Dialogue i E 15 xi Tuesday Wednesday tl2mpnli ls v 8 1 2 3 a 5 6 7 8 re EEENENICTUU ENDE ce H EA ct Nez HI H Z Scheduling Dialogue 4 md E s ipi xi MA MA MasiPH HI E GE HI HI 3a 1a 3a la 1a 3a 1a ja Tus Rub 3a 4 3a 1a JAnst 11a 1b 3a 1a 1 4 i a I Settings Br UN WO Monday Tuesday Wednesday i TAAA aa EE 4 RE CF ja 2a to 1 M a Instead of markers x X amp etc you can show the abbreviated i Settings names of the elements involved in a lesson by ticking the relevant box under lt Settings gt The function also offers options for chan ging the font size and the height and width of cells see the chapter Flags on p 166 In addition you can use the function to restrict the display to a specific range of periods e g periods 1 8 and to keep the window in the background Displaying arbitrary elements To call up the timetable of any element or lesson simply enter the name of the element or the lesson number in any part of the timetable window and press lt Tab gt or lt Enter gt
207. h teacher row under Class es enter all the classes gt Enter a different room for each teacher requiring a separate Entering lessons via Drag amp Drop 2 Classes 2 Teachers any kind involved room Element Rollup Example Entering a new lesson You can also enter lesson data using the Drag amp Drop technique P First drag the name Gauss teacher from the element rollup and drop it under Teacher in the last empty row of the grid view in the lesson window see example on the following page Lessons Window You have created a new lesson no 96 The remaining input fields can also be filled via Drag amp Drop Drag Teacb 3 Class 3b Callas L Cla ey ole P Select the classes 2a 2 ESO x YE rua je t Subjggfto rene Room Double Arist Aristoteles p 1b 3b and 4 from the pg em p Mem essen Cmm element rollup via Cti p 225 aa SEES oT Bu ue left mouse click m RECTAM P cn T P Drag the classes from on 00m a the element rollup and mF drop them under ym Class es of lesson 96 v DEN ea U m mm i TF mem preme Full name 3 Sea MC Ceres VA Room Male Line text Ste Class 1a Gauss pu Class 1b Newton Curie D i 2 N Class 2a Hugo ame 3b _ Cla S b cal v Clas4 Nobel You have created a 1 teacher 3 classes coupling gt Complete the data entry for
208. he same function is available via the context menu accessible by right clicking the mouse button Optimisation This function allows you to start the optimisation process from the scheduling dialogue The following options are available Optimisation level 1 9 This function allows you to specify the extent of the software s pre calculation function for each optimisation run Like a chess game programme the gp Untis programme calculates before each move i e before each placement of a lesson how the move will affect the situation as a whole Placement optimisation gt Number of periods to be re scheduled Enter the number of periods you want the software to schedule The optimisation tool starts by scheduling the periods most difficult to place P Preferred range The Scheduling Dialogue This function allows you to specify certain subjects e g PE or classes that should receive preferential treatment during an optimisation run Swapping optimisation gt Over ide teachers day requests When a time request entered in the master data for a teacher cannot be met this function allows the time request to be moved to another day P Swap optimisation across classes This function enables period swaps between different classes gt Preferred range This function allows you to specify certain subjects or classes that should receive preferential treatment during a swap optimisation run When a timetable is
209. her amp v Teacher Sub 4 Subject amp Subject wi Roo Room amp C Room Cla B Class B 3 Class TeDpt Teachers departme Tea B Teacher B L Teacher Sub B Subject B lic Subject Roo B Room B C k Room L Cor Corridor Corridor Eee Lesson Table Syl Master Data Lessons Scheduling Gro Groups Dep Department Classes Stud Students Teachers Des Description Cla 1 Class Rooms Tea 1 Teacher Subjects Sub 1 Subject Students Roo 1 Room Les Lesson Table All Elements L_ Element Rollup Term Overview Departments Corridors Descriptions Alias Names School Holidays Deduction grounds Reasons of absence Display Master Data Teachers department wise N V 36 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views The queries function The Query function allows you to filter the list of displayed elements in the grid view Using the query function The following example demonstrates how to create a new view and how to use the query function to display teachers of a selected department gt Open the grid adjustment dialogue of the TeDpt view from the previous example gt Click on New Views in the grid adjustment dialogue This will create a new view lll Grid Adjustment e m based on the view from which you accessed the grid Click Lauer adjustment dialogue This x ur c z p procedure is an alternative General Print method for creating views compare the chapter Creating a
210. hting but of accurately representing the different conditions at your school Analysis of input data Before starting the actual optimisation run it is useful to check your data for errors and possible problems CCC Analysis In order to obtain a good timetable it is important to locate possible bottlenecks that might cause an obstruction for the scheduling tool and to eliminate these before the optimisation Such bottlenecks occur in the form of Critical Conflict Chains CCC These are defined as groups of lessons that cannot be scheduled at the same time due to a conflict between classes and or coupled teachers The CCC analysis locates the longest chains in your lesson input data and identifies the coupled teacher at the heart of the obstruction Replacing this teacher will often result in a shortening of the chain permitting the scheduling of all periods If teacher Hugo is assigned to teach English lesson 1 to class 1a and French lesson 2 to class 2a these two lessons cannot be scheduled at the same time If lesson 1 English 1a involves a coupled teacher e g Newton who is also assigned to teach Physics to class 2a the number of lessons in this chain increases to three This means that whenever teacher Hugo teaches English to class 1a two further lessons are automatically blocked see diagram on the following page Furthermore Newton who teaches Physics to class 2a would also block the other two lessons since
211. ick on the subject Design The period details window shows that the subject Design is difficult to schedule because three teachers are involved in the lesson An dersen Gauss and Curie and two rooms are required the Chemistry lab and the Physics lab Furthermore another class 1b takes part in the lesson If go Untis attempted to schedule this lesson towards the end of the optimisation run the software would find it much more difficult to find a slot on the timetable that would suit all teachers rooms and classes involved in the lesson Two other difficult lessons for gp Untis are English and Math A CCC analysis highlights the reason for this see also the example in the chapter CCC analysis Both lessons taught by Aristotle are part of the second longest CCC with a total of 24 periods They are difficult to place because they block the other lessons in this chain while at the same time being blocked by the other lessons in the chain i e they cannot be scheduled at the same time 1a 1h 18 Textiles 137 138 gp Untis Standard Package Diagnostic Tools Print ES Print Preview Print selection m Teacher 1 11 When the percentage planning function is unable to schedule periods you can assume that inaccuracies and errors during data input are to blame Time requests Time requests are another reason why the software may find it difficult to construct the perfect timetable A number
212. ied out across different classes The only restriction is that the swap path for the continuation of a chain must always be unique Where there is a fork in the path e g both teacher and class are already scheduled elsewhere the software will ask you how you want to proceed create a conflict cancel etc and the chain must be restarted at that point Chained swaps The chained swaps function is accesible via the Chained swaps button in the scheduling dialogue Start the file demo gpn and open the scheduling dialogue and a class timetable O Activate lesson 38 and place the cursor in the row 2a on Mon 1 The aim of this exercise is to swap the cursor defined lesson lesson 38 Callas MU 2a with a lesson in a different slot Start the swap chain by clicking on Start on the Chained swaps tab The lesson row now displays a series of number symbols in some of the cells in the time grid These represent possible swap positions The lower the value the better the position Two exclamation marks behind the number e g 2 signify that a swap to this position would displace a lesson already scheduled for this slot An exclamation mark before and after the number e g 1 indicates that a swap would not cause a displacement of another period completing the swap chain see example on the following page You want to move lesson 38 Callas 2a MU from Mon 1 to Tue 1 This means that one period of lesson 41 Cal
213. iefly describes the individual parameters with reference to the master data and lesson data settings relevant for dependent weighting points ji s Avoid creating double NTPs for teachers gt Respect lunch breaks for teachers Respect subject sequence Teachers Gm Respect breaks at beginning and end of day Cancel Apply Help The weighting parameters The weighting parameters are topic based and can be modified on the appropriate tab T h e i Te ac h ers 1 ii ta b Rooms Period Distribution Time Requests Analysis Teachers Teachers Classes Subjects Main Subjects Unimportant Extremely important Av oi d h avi n g ju st one p eri o d in a UE PM Avoid having just one period in a half day for teachers half d ay for teac hers de HN Ee Optimisation of NTPs for teachers js AS Avoid creating double NTPs for teachers When a teacher has lessons on a half day a high weighting ensures that the teacher will teach more than p Oe Tascam a single period Ls Respect breaks at beginning and end of day Teachers Tab 1 ica i Respect lunch breaks for teachers Optimisation of NTPs for teachers Under Master Data Teachers you have entered values for maximum and minimum numbers of NTP s Non Teaching Per iods Use this slide to control the level of compliance with the specified settings Avoid creating double NTPs for teachers In addition to controlling single NTPs you can give penalt
214. ilable a warning beep will sound to alert you to this fact Scheduling period blocks Schedule the two unscheduled periods of lesson 53 for Mon 6 7 You can schedule the two periods either separately as single periods or in a single step as a double period Click on lesson 53 in the list of unscheduled periods Example 173 174 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Delete period O Highlight the periods Mon 6 and Mon 7 with the mouse O Click on Schedule the period f Scheduling Dialogue ER Ioj xl Unscheduled Information History Chained swaps Periods 4 1 2b Callas DE All unsched perio 43 4 4 Hugo DE ai Monday 3 4 s Class 1a Mo 6 j2 a Element blocked do you still want to save it NI L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Specialtext Cluster 3 Monday afternoon is blocked by a time request entered under master data for classes You can override the restriction by manually scheduling periods on Monday afternoon Alternatively delete the time request directly in the scheduling dialogue see the chapter Time Requests on p 165 The query Element blocked do you still want to save it appears Click on OK The two periods will be scheduled as a double period Deleting periods Delete i e de schedule periods using one of the following options gt By double clicking on an active period g
215. in period until the rooms details are displayed Repeat the same process for the room timetable until each period displays the class scheduled to have lessons in the room Inspect the timetable of a class and of its home room The examples on the previous page show class 1a and its home room Ria As you can see the class is not always scheduled to have lessons in its home room because the room is occasionally occupied by other classes The entry x e g Thursday period 1 on the class timetable in the example denotes periods for which no room has been allocated O Select the menu item Scheduling Room Optimisation The room optimisation dialogue appears where you can specify if you want to optimize locked and or off site rooms and if the room capacity should be taken into consideration Click on Start Room Optimisation Click on the button again when the room optimisation run is finished As you can see the room optimisation tool has allocated the home room R1a for most of the lessons of class 1a and the designated subject room PE and Design for some of the lessons Please note the situation for classes without a designated room Before the room optimisation class 3b was scheduled to have lessons in room Ria on Tuesday periods 4 and 5 Class 4 was scheduled for room R1a on Saturday period 4 The room optimisation tool moved both classes to another room since the placement violated the rule that a class must n
216. in the details window of the scheduling dialogue see below The Information tab Enter the lesson number 21 in the input field and confirm by pressing the Tab or the Enter key The left half of the Infor mation tab now provides the following details on lesson 21 Placed Scheduled 3 periods per week have already been scheduled a total of 122 periods per year excluding holidays and public holidays The applicable date range is displayed on the left below the input field here the total school year The display also contains details on any time restrictions in place for the lesson Placed Target Diff Lesson 21 consists of 4 periods per week one of which remains to be scheduled making a difference of 1 The Scheduling Dialogue 169 Lessons Unscheduled Information History Chained swaps z 4 Class 4 Mabel 70 3 2D E P Soe SER 30 6 2008 123 AW ek 30 1 DE Year 1221 The right part of the tab contains information on the elements involved in the lesson Place the cursor in the class row to display relevant class details Class Class 4 is scheduled to have 31 periods per week in total 30 of which have been scheduled and one of which remains to be scheduled The total number of scheduled periods per year is 1221 Lessons a Unscheduled Information History 30 9 2007 Placed Target Diff 30 6 2008 Week 3 4 1 Year 123 DE Teacher Teacher Hugo
217. in the lesson window Weighting 117 General notes If you have not worked with the weighting parameters before we would suggest you proceed as follows First familiarize yourself with all the weighting parameters and their functions Then move the sliders for all the attributes that do not apply to your school under any circumstances to the very left position 0 unimportant for instance for Optimisation of the off site rooms if your school has no off site rooms Even weighting Caution If in doubt about the distributions relative importance of an attribute set the slider to position 1 not very important instead of O Next adjust the remaining sliders in order of increasing importance from not very important to extremely important Frequency Watch the frequency with 0 1 2 3 4 5 which you assign the different Weight levels of importance As a general rule it is desirable to assign the weighting settings between 1 not very important and 5 extremely important in roughly equal numbers or in decreasing frequency as the level of importance increases Please see the example shown in the two graphs the x axis shows the 6 weighting levels the y axis shows the relative frequency of each weighting Frequency 0 1 2 3 4 5 Weight 118 gp Untis Standard Package Weighting Frequency You should never end up with a distribution where a disproportionatel
218. ini x lessons involved In the CCC Critical Conflict Chain analysis of couplings chains The table also amp Investigated variations pete 199 802 Total 2 851 058 displays the abbreviated names of teachers in brackets next to some of Lessons 9 New 10 Ne 24 33 Anst 31 Aris 2 New 4 New 33 New 5 Arist 3 30 Arist the elements The H H H 24 JTB Arnst 33 Arist zu 53 Rub pu rpose of th IS fu nctio n Is 23 33 Anst 31 Arist 11 C F 30 Arist l l 23 66 Cer 59 Cer 60 Cer 65 Cer 86 Cer 68 Cer described In a later 22 8 New 11 75 81 93 New 94 ch apte r 21 42 Callas 37 Callas 34 Callas 11 75 81 21 76f rist 75 Rub 54 Rub 73 30 Arist 21 18 Hugo S85 Hugo 15 Huao 11 Hugo 21 Hugo 16 Hugo Click on 8 New in 20 8 New 81 Curie 74 New 93 New 94 New 6 R 17 S New 10 Ne amp ew 76 79 92 New 43 the first row of the 17 18 Hugo 59 Ce 60 Ce 65 Ce 86 Cer 11 Hugo 15 11 35 Callas 39 Callas 73 36 Callas middle part of the 14 4 Gauss 7 Gauss 82 Gauss 74 Cure 80 Curie 5 Gauss 14 10 New 79 Cure 4 Cune S2 New 74 New B window see figure 13 1 Gauss 76 79 4 Gauss 43 B 12 S Cune 4 Curne 81 Cure 4 Cure 72 Curie 80 Cure 10 11 7 Curie 87 Curie 5S8 Curne 72 Curie 70 Curie Classes Teachers New New New New Curie New 2b New 2b 3a 3b
219. into account when optimizing the timetable Example A PE teacher is scheduled to teach periods 1 and 5 in the main building and period 3 at the off site sports track The timetabling tool will ensure that periods 2 and 4 remain unscheduled for the teacher to allow him or her sufficient time to reach the sports track Breaks of different lengths Many schools use timetables where some breaks are longer than others and where it is therefore possible to reach an off site location during one of the longer breaks Breaks of sufficient length to reach an off site location can be marked in the time grid under Breaks Time Grid zoi General Breaks Substitute Lunch break from to o Maximum number of classes with lunch break at the same time Double periods must not span this break Entry Off site transfer possible in this break 5 6 6 7 12 25 1320 14 s The Breaks time grid tab tea am e The time grid above shows that the 20 minute break between periods 2 and 3 is sufficiently long enough to reach the off site location The PE teacher in the example above would therefore be able to teach period 2 in the main building and still manage to reach the sports track in time for period 3 Start time graduation Instead of wasting an entire period to reach an off site location the start time of certain lessons can be adjusted slightly to suit the situation Room Logic Exa
220. ion 139 140 Scheduling Timetable Rep CCC Analvsis Weighting Optimisation Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation Overall Diagnosis Scheduling Dialogue gp Untis Standard Package Diagnostic Tools Diagnosis After optimizing your timetable you can analyze the results with the diagnosis function of the gp Untis software using a number of different criteria Open the diagnosis window via the menu item Scheduling Dia gnosis The window is divided into two sections the selection Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions Timetable diagnosis Data analysis Minimum weighting 0 4 IV Only show report totals gt 0 25 9 2006 m 29 3 2006 Diagnosis Subj 1 day imposs Less double pers Non sched pers Missing teachers Lunchbreak too short 4 4 Selection ions e OR Wi n GO sce 1 Lunchbreak too long Half day requ Consecutive pers One per half day Subj room missing Periods with no room Subject twice a day Double per split up Unrequ double pers 2 prds wk subj con Mn subj after Per n n24 Fringe periods Tea n3 T CO CO CO CO J CO CO CO CO J CO WN J CD CO wm CO CO window on the left and the details window on the right The selection window The largest space in the selection window is devoted to the list of items diagnosed by the diagnosis tool These items are divided Type of diagnosis
221. ips for further details Class Clash Code CCC This symbol allows the software to schedule two lessons at the same time even when the same class is involved in both lessons Enter values 1 9 where a conflict is permissible between lessons with the same CCC and A H where a conflict is permissible between lessons with different non numerical CCC Please see the chapter User tips for further details Unscheduled periods This field displays how many lesson periods remain unscheduled on the timetable Clusters Lesson Properties 93 This field is only of relevance when using the module Course Scheduling The Codes tab X Locked Lessons marked X are locked on the timetable The periods of a locked lesson are not affected by subsequent optimisation runs I Ignored Lessons marked i are ignored on the timetable The lessons are treated as if they did not exist and are not scheduled by the optimisation tool or displayed by the scheduling tools scheduling dialogue planning timetable or on the timetable The values and weekly periods for the elements involved however count towards the total In lesson views ignored lessons are marked with the letter i next to the lesson number Indirectly ignored lessons i e lessons not directly coded i but containing an element marked Ignore are shown in the lesson details window with an i displayed after the ignored element The only Ignore code not
222. is a time restriction for class 1a on three afternoons of the week see Time Requests under Master Data Classes Y Time Requests Cla 55 0 x 3 42 EES ay alalt x Aji i a Class 1a Gauss Unspecified day requests Eee Requested Days am Halves D 1 0 MU EN n p ERTE nspecified blocks jo Number of days Period from to Ee Eee en e s Mond AA If a cell is available such as Fri 5 in the example the cell can be used to accommodate the active lesson Schedule the unscheduled period of lesson 11 by double clicking Schedule P period on the cell Fri 5 or by clicking on he Scheduling Timetable Roo m ava i la b i ity g Scheduling Timetable Click on lesson 21 on the Unscheduled tab As you can see some periods are highlighted in purple This means that the allocated room and the designated alternative rooms are unavailable For purposes of clarity the colour codes defined under master data and displayed in the scheduling timetable can be deactivated by clicking on Show lesson colours Locking periods Lock scheduled periods by clicking on Lock period if you want the scheduling tool to ignore them during the optimisation run Locked lessons are marked with asterisks k x X and cannot be moved by the optimisation tool Swapping periods Find a suitable swap partner for a period on the same class timeta
223. ity 92 school data 257 second name 58 63 selecting timetables 241 selection window 206 Index 315 serial change 84 settings 87 one week 87 scheduling dialogue 188 single periods weighting 107 single timetables 306 sort periods tt Layout 2 231 sorting 14 columns 14 master data 49 master data elements 32 special functions all elements window 21 special text in the details window tt 211 in the periods window tt 227 standard layout 213 start time graduation 291 statistical code 54 90 students 90 female 90 in the details window 211 number of students in the period window tt 228 subject 88 subject group 66 subject room 68 subject sequence 297 classes 69 92 negative 298 positive 297 teachers 69 swap suggestions scheduling dialogue 191 swapping periods in the scheduling timetable 157 in the timetable 152 in the timetalbe 150 scheduling dialogue 190 316 gp Untis Standard Package Index T teacher status 63 term 240 text 54 90 in the heading of print outs 238 time in the tt details window 210 time range 240 time requests 21 51 copy amp paste 263 deleting 263 in the scheduling dialogue 165 in the tt period window 227 timetable a m p m division line 232 comparison 301 301 306 highlighting changed periods 233 in menu 213 layout 1 214 layout 10 215 layout 11 215 layout 20 217 layout 30 217 218 layouts 213 new view 219 nr of timetables per page 242 predefined layouts 214 row headings 2
224. ive locations of the rooms in the school This would save teachers and students from wasting precious time when moving from room to room In an alternative room ring neighbouring rooms should therefore be listed in sequence Another option is to use alternative room rings and chains to place the function of the rooms in context When a room capacity has been defined for individual rooms under master data you can list alternative rooms with approximately the same capacity in sequence in an alternative room ring Another aspect that could influence the order of rooms in alternative room rings is the equipment provided in the individual rooms Classes without a designated room If your school has classes without designated HEEE rooms you can use pseudo rooms by assigning a fictitious room to a class You can then block this room by entering the time request 3 for every period of the week Enter a room from the classroom ring as an alternative room for your pseudo room gp Un Mednesday tis will now select a suitable classroom for the class see example Ps1 Yf Rooms Roo olx Ex DIXI SUIS ayia fa Mame Full name Altern room NW RE Class Room 1a R3a Rib R2a R2b R3a Class Room 3a Ria Pseudo Room 1 3b Ria Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a Class Room 1b Class Room Za Class Room zb R2b R2a Ps2 Including pseudo rooms in an alternative room ring Class Groups Time requests for
225. k X 8 0 O 0 X Locked a 0 Tara Year Max for a Ignore i O 3 0 amo i Ignored F E DontPrnt N 10 0 amo N Do not print F Stat Code s 11 0 Fl BH Statistical Code F Personnel No 12 0 am Personnel number F Title FJ 3 0 amo Title F First name Fj 4 0 Fl o First name Status 15 0 amo Teacher status F Dept 8 495 Fl io CD F NTPs F s5 0 amo NTP F Consec pers 18 0 am Max consec peric F Daily Fr Brk 19 0 Fl B Daily Fr Break O Factor F 20 0 amo Value O Plan w eek El 21 0 F B Plan F Plan Y ear FJ 22 0 Fl Bi Value of planned p Targ WeekM 23 0 90 Tara Week Max fc L Taraet Yea M 24 r1 0 Tara Year Max for 1 M Master Data Views L Grid Adjustment LI Appl TeDptSel Teacher Department D Fields General Print The word Query appears in the title row of the view and the grid displays only the teachers assigned to department D117 n Rub Rubens You can even combine selection criteria by entering the place holders for any arbitrary string and for a single character in the entry field gt Enter C in the row Full Name under Selection and click on Data selection Apply The query function displays only the teachers assigned to department D117 and whose full name starts with C 37 38 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views
226. l 246 gp Untis Standard Package Printing Print details E Individual timetable Timetables per page Number of timetables horizontally Number of timetables in vertically One timetable for each week New page for each element Coupling legend footnote Placemt of the legend No legend zl Number of columns v Use alias Print frames m Lessons L Cla Lesson display Placement of lessons No lessons L Print details xj Overview Layout 20 r Number of rows columns per page 11 Rows classes teachers per page Columns weekly periods per page 40 r Coupling legend footnote Coupling legend footnote 2 Number of columns L r Intermediate headings o After each n th line EJ After each m th column Heading prior to the following elements Entry similar to 2a 5a 7a Cancel Abbreviations A legend can be printed for the abbreviations used for subjects and or teachers The following example shows a legend containing the abbreviated and the full names of subjects The legend is displayed on the right hand side of the timetable Class 1b Newton Name Full name EE BI Biology B E i DS Design Geographyand Economics History Mathematics Music Boys PE Girls PE ReligiousEducation Textiles Abbreviations ls Type of abbreviation Subjects Plac
227. l possible 95 96 gp Untis Standard Package Lesson Properties Warning Warning This code is only useful for lessons with more than 6 periods per week Thecodes 2 C and D are mutually exclusive R Place in a fringe period Use this option to specify lessons that should be scheduled in fringe periods see also free period subjects The attribute ensures that lessons marked R are preferentially scheduled at the beginning or the end of a school day or half day in the time grid For further details please see the chapter Fringe period and optional subjects under User tips on p 296 S Schedule class group later Use this function to change the planning priorities for lessons in class groups The code instructs the optimisation tool to leave the scheduling of these lessons until after other classes of the same class group have been scheduled Usethis code only when you are familiar with working with class groups 2 Subject more than once day The gp Untis optimisation algorithm assumes that a subject should only be scheduled once a day for any one class except block lessons and double periods This condition has a very high weighting To allow the software to schedule a subject at any time deactivate the condition using this function The options 2 C and D are mutually exclusive V Variable teacher To give the optimisation tool greater flexibility lessons can be marked
228. las 2a AR will be displaced Place the cursor on Tue 1 and click on Swap The Scheduling Dialogue 197 En e The original period of lesson 38 has now been moved to Tue 1 The change is also reflected on the timetable Lesson 41 with one displaced period automatically becomes the active lesson Schedubng Dinlogue Again gp Untis marks suitable swap positions with numbers displayed in the lesson row If you are dissatisfied with the swap results you can undo indivi dual steps of the process and even the entire swap chain 198 op Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue 4 Cullas ARRIJ 25 3 You want to schedule the displaced period of lesson 41 for Sat 1 The symbol 1 indicates that the swap would not cause the displacement of another period i e the swap chain would be completed Place the cursor on Sat 1 and click on Swap Lesson 41 Callas 2a AR displaced from Tue 1 has been moved to Sat 1 The swap chain is now complete Please note that function Chained swaps only supports swaps that do not result in a significant decrease in timetable quality based on the weighting settings you have entered This means that only the swap partners identified in the lesson row can be used for swapping Scheduling half periods The gp Untis programme can also be used to schedule half periods gt Open the file Demo4 gpn gt Activate lesson 39 Callas
229. lass es Subject roo Home Room Double per Block 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria DS PL Ria a The automated teacher swap function offers the following settings No optimisation of teacher assignment Teacher assignment during optimisation No optimisation of teach assign Ticking this box deactivates the teacher swap function All F Ma swap with other subjects V Variable teacher codes will be Ig nored Swap only less with equal periods Swap only within one class level The following two input options are only available for use with a E the Lesson Planning module No swap wth other subjects Teachers can only be swapped between lessons of the same subject Swap only lessons with equal periods Teachers can only be swapped between lessons with the same number of periods Swap only within one class level Teachers can only be swapped between classes of the same level Re assign original teachers Tick this option to delete all teacher swaps carried out in previous optimisation runs This means that each subject will again be taught by the teacher originally assigned to the lesson under Lesson Teachers 132 gp Untis Standard Package Optmisation Timetable diagnosis New diagnosis Inp 3 2 O9 CO CO CO PO hO CO CO CO nO Dh CO H O0 o o PTH fos n2 g Strategy A Refresh list o Minimum weighting 0 4 Only show report totals gt 0 25 09 2006 v 29 9 2006
230. layout 3D layout C Embossed C Embossed llle ul im Z T E EN Es Eu E a m E E E EEE m to 229 230 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views Layout 2 Timetable The settings on the Layout 2 tab partly affect both the screen and Settings the print layout partly only the print layout or the HTML output Double periods like single periods Z Layout 01 Individual timetable with days across the top General Selection range Layout Layout2 HTML Double periods are displayed like single Period window Changed Periods 4 Double periods like single periods v Red pe riods 7 Comb class names 2a 2b gt 2ab Bold v Label couplings with a dot m Italic Label locked periods with a mark Emphasised by Separate periods in case of clash Underlined Com b class names 2a 2b gt 2ab Sort periods On teacher timetables it is often desirable Cover Planning Print 1 No absence reason daily abs Do not print empty rows r ii wi UN bci me i to be able to see all the classes the ES eee ca teacher teaches Combined class names V Use alias for details window egend Show a m p m division line can be used to show all the classes ina HTML index pg with full names I single cell Cancel Apply Help Label couplings with dot Coupled lessons are marked with a dot in the period window
231. le window not only depends on the details displayed in the timetable periods but also on the selected font The font size and type can be changed under Timetable Settings General Font The relative size of the timetable windows can be changed as follows gt Move the cursor to the dividing line between the timetable window and details window The cursor changes to an up and down arrow gt Hold down the Shift key and drag the line up or down P Release the mouse button The timetable window resizes to the specified size User Defined Views 235 Colour codes The colour codes specified for elements under master data will be displayed in the timetable Colour coding of elements 4 ib Class 1b Newton Timetable Gen 4 EX indi E EJ DE esl The example shows the colour coding of subjects and teachers i e teacher Rub Layout 01 Horizontal heading Day names heading raed A ae oni teaches E Cancel Apply Help x I double period of German yellow background Day of the week Arial 8 1 0 Bui y a percentage an Tuesday M Bold 10 Max number of characters F Itali per day 1 20 ns Day date for the weekly plan Column headings Underlined Weedon sce Sene 41 z Customise column headings e g days of the week under Column heading under Monday Timetable Settings Monday 236 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Views The overview
232. lease note that time requests for entire days and half days can be entered in the lower right hand side of the time grid window Assign the time request 1 to days Fri Sat periods 1 3 P Click on 1 gt Highlight the area Fri Sat periods 1 3 You have entered the time request 1 for Fri Sat periods 1 3 for teacher New Please note that the button for time request 1 remains active until you deactivate the function by clicking on it This means that you can enter further 1 time requests at this time by clicking on the relevant periods in the time grid Delete time requests for certain periods or blocks of periods by highlighting the cells and clicking on Delete Delete time request Unspecified time requests gt Switch to teacher Rub Rubens using the previous time request Example example Teacher Rub is a part time teacher and therefore entitled to a free day per week If possible the teacher would also like two additional free afternoons 262 gp Untis Standard Package Time Requests Enter the following data under unspecified time requests gt Enter 1 in the row 3 under Days This instructs the optimisation tool to schedule one free day for teacher Rubens P Enter 2 in the row 2 under p m The optimisation tool attempts to schedule two additional free afternoons for teacher Rubens SS Time Requests Tea 51 O xl Enter time requests for half days in the column H
233. lege classes who do not attend lessons every day of the week Context menu The context menu is a pop up element that appears when right clicking the mouse button Use the context menu to open certain windows in the Cover Planning module and to carry out specific functions such as copying Core time Periods marked with the time request 3 when a lesson mustbe scheduled for a particular element Coupling Coupled lessons couplings are lessons containing more than one element of the same type Couplings can apply to teachers and classes The main characteristic of coupled lessons is that all associated elements are scheduled at the same time Cover mode A synonym for working with the functions offered by the Cover Planning module compare Untis mode the functions offered by the standard gp Untis software package 308 gp Untis Standard Package Glossary Double period Two subject periods taught in consecutive periods by the same teacher to the same class Element The main term for the data sets of teachers classes subjects and rooms Element Rollup The element rollup accessible via the dedicated button on the main tool bar allows simple data input via Drag amp Drop or double click Home room The room of a teacher or a class where the lessons should be scheduled if possible Ignore Lessons marked ignore will be ignored by the optimisation and the scheduling tools Lesson In gp Untis lessons
234. legend can be customized under Timetable Settings If you want to exclude a certain lesson from the printed legend simply mark the lesson with the code L Not in legend Print details E X Individual timetable Test school DEMO Timetable 2007 2008 Timetables per page Zoom In Zoom Out Out Close 1 Number of timetables EUM Zoom Gut horizontally Number of timetables in a vertically One timetable for each week age Prey Page Two Page New page for each element 28 04 07 Valid from 10 October For demo and test only Tea Diaad qp Untis 2007 Timetable 2007 2008 Test school DEMO 12 Coupling legend footnote Placemt of the legam Andersen Hans Christian i Humber of CURIE Placement of abbrev No abbreviations g Number of columns v Use alias Print frames Lessons L Tea Lesson display Placement of lessons No lessons Print frames Cancel Mo Tea Sub Rm Cla Text Time 6 Ander DS PL 3a 3b Curie HE HE1 3a 3b 1a No Tea Sub Rm Cla 1 Ander DS PL 4 Curie TX CL 4 2 Andr MA 4 7 Ander DS PL Voluntary Exerdse Gauss MA Gauss DS PL 1b 3 Ancer DS PL 1b 3b Curie TX CL 1a 1b 4 Ander MA R3a 4 8 Callas AR R3a 3a 3b auss MA Ander MU Ria 3a 3b 5 Callas CH R2a 2a 2b 3a Special Class 9 Curie TX CL 2 2a Gauss MA R2b 2a 2b 3a Ander DS PL 2h 2a Ander MA
235. loaded and displayed at the end of the optimisation run Optimisation 133 Strategy B Several series Using Strategy B gp Untis initially constructs a series of n indivi dual timetables as for Strategy A The best timetable of the series is then used as the starting point for a new series of n individual timetables all of them very similar to the best previous timetable This process the construction of a TT 4 series of new timetables each TT 1 TT2 based on the best timetable of the TT 2 TT 4 previous series is repeated until the wwe TT 3 M TT 2 final timetable can no longer be TT 4 improved upon TUR TT 3 TT 4 Strategy C Percentage planning Using Strategy C the software constructs a series of n timetables using the percentage of periods specified in the input field 96 of periods to be scheduled If this field is empty the default value of 3096 is used instead The best of the n timetables is locked conditionally and used as the basis for the next series of n timetables This run will use a higher percentage of periods i e more periods will be scheduled When the input field for Increase percentage by is empty gp Untis automatically substitutes the default value of 10 The percentage of periods to be scheduled is increased by increments until the software reaches the point where it attempts to schedule all the periods 100 TT 1 30 TT 2 30 TT 3 30 TT 4 30 Strategy C TT 1 40 TT
236. lock Boundary period for the following aspects Boundary period for the following aspects Use this input field to specify a boundary period Main subjects max once after boundary period Controls the level of importance for the above specification per week Main subject at least once up to boundary period Controls the level of importance for the above specification including the boundary period per week The difference between the two weighting settings depends on what happens after the boundary period The task of the first weighting is clear a main subject must not be scheduled more than once per week after the boundary period The meaning of the second weighting by contrast is not as obvious Choosing a high priority means that the main subject can be scheduled after a boundary period as often as necessary as long as it is scheduled at least once before the boundary period You have defined period 5 as your boundary period Now you want to schedule 4 periods of English a main subject If the software has already scheduled one period of English for Monday period 6 a high weighting for Main subjects max once after boundary period ensures that the other three periods are scheduled before or in period 5 Weighting 113 A high weighting for Main subject at least once up to boundary period by contrast would ensure that English could be scheduled after period 5 on two other school days as long as it is scheduled
237. lready scheduled periods of lesson 53 in the example X Locked period of the active lesson see the chapter Locking periods on p 157 X Fields marked x are blocked by the teacher For instance teacher R i alrea scheduled to teach class 1a on Mon 5 which means that lesson 53 with teacher Rub cannot be scheduled for Mon 5 without creating a conflict X Acapital X shows a coupling involving the teacher e g Wed 5 Rub DE Rib 1b x X amp A marker with two asterisks denotes locked periods creating a conflict e g the PE lesson on Thu 7 8 involving teacher Rub Locked periods cannot be moved by the automated scheduling tool s e e c pter ocking periods on p 157 amp Denotes periods with several unavailable elements classes and or teachers Activate lesson 11 GEc class 1a on Sat 4 by double clicking on the period The symbol amp appears in slot Thu 5 indicating that a period of lesson 11 cannot be scheduled for Thursday period 5 since several elements of the lesson class 1b 2b and the teacher Hugo are unavailable hat tim xample on the right 93 New MA R2b at that time see example on the right EATI a 156 op Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Timetable he periods on Mon Tue and Thu not occupied by classes or teachers are marked The symbol identifies periods that cannot be scheduled for another reason In this case the reason
238. mple Start of period Start of period main building off site building Walking time 15 Minutes Period 1 0 amp 00hrs Period 1 0815hrs Period 2 0400hrs Period 2 0915hrs Period 3 1000hrs Using this method the PE teacher from the previous example can be scheduled to teach periods 1 2 and 5 in the main building and period 3 at the off site sports track The software schedules a free period for period 4 to allow the teacher sufficient time to return to the main building after period 3 Period 3 10d 5hrs 291 292 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic Off site codes Off site rooms are marked with an off site code entered under master data Off site rooms with graduated lesson starts Enter the same numerical off site code for all the rooms at an off site location where you operate a system of start time graduation The permitted values are between 1 and 9 Off site building 2 Your school has two off site locations The first is a 15 minute walk away from the main building the second a 10 minute walk away from the first off site location Enter a value for each off site room as described above to enable gp Untis to schedule the teacher as follows Period 1 main building Period 2 off site location 1 Period 3 off site location 2 The software allocates one free period for the return from one of the off site buildings to the main building or from off site location 2 to off site location 1
239. n addition the following key combinations are available Ctrl Right Arrow last period of the week Ctrl Left Arrow first period of the week Alt Home first period of the day Alt End last period of the day Ctrl Arrow Up first row Ctrl Arrow Down last row Alt Right Arrow next day Alt Left Arrow previous day The different scheduling dialogue functions can be called up via the following shortcut keys Insert Schedule period Delete De schedule period Ctrl X Delete activate lesson F7 Lock period Ctrl Enter New active lesson Ctrl lt R gt Room dialogue Ctrl Shift Enter 2nd active lesson F8 Alternative room Swapping periods In addition to the period swap function using Drag amp Drop the scheduling dialogue and to a limited extent the scheduling timetable offers additional functions for swapping already scheduled periods Use these functions when the timetable requires further improvements he Scheduling Dialogue gt Suggested swaps gt Consecutive swaps gt Chained swaps Swap suggestions This function offers swap suggestions for a cursor selected period on a class timetable To this end gp Untis evaluates the timetable based on your weighting settings and informs you if the quality of the timetable would be increased or decreased as the result of a swap Op
240. n the Timetable tab under Master Data Teachers e g 2 4 The weighting determines the level of importance of these settings i e the degree of compliance with the settings Leaving the field empty means that the weighting has no effect on the optimisation process Independent weighting points by contrast involve general settings such as Avoid non teaching periods NTPs or Avoid having just one period in a half day for teachers since window periods and single periods do not require additional specifications to be ente red under master data or lessons The weighting settings can be accessed via the menu item Scheduling Weighting The weighting dialogue contains the different weighting parameters sorted by topic and organized on a number of different tabs Increase or decrease individual weighting settings by using the slider provided From left to right the weighting sliders offer 6 different levels of importance gt Position 0 unimportant gt Position 1 not very important gt Position 2 fairly important Weighting 107 P Position 3 important ini xj Rooms Period Distribution Time Requests Analysis Teachers Teachers Classes Subjects MaiSubects P Position 4 very important Unimportant Extremely important Avoid having just one period in a half day for teachers gt Position 5 extremely important pola T Dptimisation of NTPs for teachers The following chapter br
241. nd Stu are student Cla20B Class 20 O L1 timetables Cla2 c Clase 20 B El Cla30 Class 30 L O Clas04 Class 30 O O Layout details e g Cla1A Layout 1 This layout displays the days of the week in columns and the periods of the day in rows see figure The sub layout detail e g Cla1A indicates that the layout is a variant of the master format The full name of this timetable layout is Class schedule big The a Class ta Gaus Timetable Cth Itix layout is included in the menu per default Timetable Settings The name of the layout can also be found on the Gene ral tab under lt Timetable Settings gt zl Casse d 17 9 2007 30 6 2008 28 Periods week 2 Unscheduled pers 4 Timetable comparison xl r Font size n Per overview Coupl legend Heading Row heading Periods heading dm cr I Timetable Layouts 215 oom 1a Timetable Cla1A Layout 10 This layout displays the days of the weeks in rows and the periods of the day in columns The example on the right shows a room timetable with layout Roo10B Layout 11 This layout is important for use with the Multi Week Timetable module It shows the individual weeks of the school year in columns and the periods of the T week in rows and provides a clear display DE of two weekly alternating lessons and lesson interruptions School week o he o d
242. new view above gt Field Active Column Widtk Full Nam Sort Description Descending gt Enter the name TeDptSel and the full name Teacher Department D117 for the new view in the window Shortname I TeDptSel Name Teacher Department D117 Full name Cancel A new view entitled TeDptSel appears gt Open the grid adjustment dialogue of the view TeDptSel gt Tick the box Query in the grid adjustment dialogue You will see a new column entitled Selection gt Enter D117 in the row Department under Selection an d cl j ck on lt App ly Active Column Width FullNam Sort Selection Description Descending z 660 m 0 Name d 5 1195 M 2 Print name o 4 540 am Room F 6 1005 Fl B Text O H Description E Grid m NE p m Marked o i Be Inactive Jj Ignore MES js Moora D tatistical Code TeDptSel Teacher Department D117 N Personnel number F 0 Title O General Print r 5 First name O l Teacher status a Active Column WidtF Full Nam Sort Selection Description Descending F 3 Department 4 Name 2 645 O o0 Name L F NH Max consec perc Full name 5 100 EF 2 Print name F H 0 Daily Fr Break O Room 4 0 oa Room O FH 0 TER O Text Fj 6 0 oa Text F FH 0 PE O Description 7 0 F BN Description F FH 0 Value of plannedp O Marked m O 7 0 oa m Marked n i Targ Week Mare O Loc
243. now the home room to all empty Teacher Subiect Seles Subject room Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Code s Line slots on the timetable of class 1a Details entered manually under Lessons Classes remain unchanged as the new home room is only entered into empty cells in the lesson view 28 288 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic H Master Data Class HEi x gy i Sole e m f ial her Subject Class es Doubl 1a 1b 2a 2b 1a 1a ib 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a Subject room Home Room PL Cer Arist Callas Callas Replacing changed home rooms Example Based on the following example you want to change the home room of class 1a from R1a to the room STUDIO Change the details accordingly under Master Data of class 1a At this point the lesson window display still shows room R1a as the home room of class 1a 3S Master Data Class j loj x Fae OK arm Papst 9167 is TeacherSubject Class es Subject room Home Room Doubl Block Hugo 1a 1b 2a 2h 1b Ander 1a PL Ba Class 2a Hugo Arist 1ajb 2b Class 2b Andersen Arist 1a STUDIO SER Class 3a Aristoteles D b ZU ied Arist 1a STUDIO SESS Llass 3b Callas Callas 1a STUDIO 4 Class 4 Mobel Callas 1a STUDIO el Nobel 1a STUDIO Cer 1a STUDIO Arist 1a STUDIO Callas 1a STUDIO Callas 1a STUDIO Nobel 1a STUDIO Ce
244. ns involve the class 2b Lesson 10 by contrast involves a different class but the same teacher Newton and therefore cannot be scheduled at the same time as lesson 8 either Shortening CCCs The longest chain the first row in the middle part of the window contains 27 periods that cannot be scheduled at the same time since this would lead to conflicts as described above If you consider that there may be time requests defined for each teacher class and lesson that each lesson may have additional conditions imposed on it e g main subjects should not be scheduled too late in the day that rooms are not always available and that all this applies equally to the elements of all the other chains the second longest still has a total number of 24 involved lessons it is easy to see how a large number of chains with many periods can be the cause of a serious timetabling bottleneck Analysis of Input Data 123 You now have the option of shortening the chain by assigning a Note different teacher to individual lessons Please note that swapping teachers may not necessarily result in a shortening of the chain In the worst case scenario it may even result in a lengthening of the chain Before the swap both teams can teach at the same time A lengthening of the chain can occur when a Should be replaced by Teacher re assigned teacher is a member of a diffe rent teacher team that is not yet part of the chai n z Teacher Tea
245. ntered under Master Data Teachers for maximum number of periods per day in sequence Input block Periods in last morning slot Maximum Teachers scheduled to have lessons on the last period of the morning are often at a disadvantage You can therefore specify the maximum number of last morning periods each teacher should teach Weighting 109 Weighting Indicates the level of compliance to this rule On the Timetable tab under Master Data panes Master Data Teachers the weighting for NTPs lunch usc Teachers unch brea break maximum number of periods per day ss tiai and maximum periods in sequence for indi r max consec prds 0 vidual teachers can be increased further to Very important The Classes tab Rooms Period Distribution Time Requests Analysis Avoid non teaching periods Teachers Teachers Classes Subjects Main Subjects NTPs Unimportant Extremely important Odd Yr Avoid non teaching periods NTPs Co ntrols the avoidance of NTP S for SERE E Respect maximum or minimum number of periods day for classes classes P 3 Respect lunch break requests for classes 2 N Respect class sequence Classes Respect maximum or minimum EE number of periods day for classes Controls the level of compliance with the values entered under Master Data Classes Classes Tab Respect lunch break requests for classes Controls the level of compliance with the values
246. nts display Lessons with student total height As the example shows the active period can now be Cancel identified by the colon preceding the abbreviated name e g GEC and a coupled lesson by a dot preceding the name e g DS Monday Tuesday Wednesday SERERE ER EZ ERES ee es Fe eek Les 11 r a JEN MU BI PE Eea EN AR AR RE Ds ps Keds Pec MA DE ci 1h B MA RE PEt DE DE DE RE MA DS DS GE PEC MIJ M 2a MU RE MA DE EN MERER aR Perel ma NES HI HI RE 3b RE MA AR AR MU ESI MA MA PEE PH HI 233 MU TX DE Tea Hugo 3b 3b 4 4 4 EN a ee a ea eee 4a 3a 2a s Rm Ria fla lai da 4 da da 1a Ta a4 da da 167 168 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Saving individual settings When using the gp Untis software on two different computers e g at school and at home you will rarely be working with two identical systems Differences in hardware screen display graphics cards etc can necessitate annoying and time consuming adjustments when switching from one system to another Your individual settings for the scheduling dialogue e g font size column width etc are therefore saved in the Untis ini file located in the Windows directory or your gp Untis 200x directory saving you the hassle of having to re enter your settings when loading the programme on another computer Further details on active lessons can be found on the Information tab
247. o schedule an element class teacher room that is unavailable for the period in question However there may be situations when you actively want to provoke such a conflict for instance when some students of a class take part in one particular lesson and other students of the same class take part in another but none of the students take part in both lesson You want to schedule Graphics for classes 2a and 2b atthe same Example time as the Textiles lesson o o Open the file demo gpn and the scheduling timetable Switch to the scheduling timetable of class 2b and de schedule lesson 94 on Friday period 6 by double clicking on the lesson The list of unscheduled lessons now contains one period of lesson 94 e Mark the lesson in the Unscheduled window and drag it to the textiles period on Fri 7 hold down the left mouse button The period details window displays full details of the conflicting lesson Helease the left mouse button Select Save with class clash and click on Save block gt Y Scheduling Timetable J fe mj xl 30 5 2008 GA Save block Lessons 94 Mo 1 gt Fr Other lessons causing 4 clash Number of clashing lessons 1 Th Fr Ca IV Save with class clash 1 ave with teacher clas a RE x Save with room clash l DE FH DE Bl DE MA B l Save block Cancel H MILI HI CH MA Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Cluster Curie
248. of 3 periods each Since block lessons are often slightly shorter than the sum Weighting 115 116 ap Untis Standard Package Weighting of the single periods for instance because there are no breaks between periods students will be able to leave school early or start school later than the normal start time Teachers Teachers Classes Subjects Main Subjects T h e Ti m e Req u ests ta b Rooms Period Distribution Unimportant Extremely important E ra Aca Time requests for teachers Time requests for classes IET Time requests for subjects Time requests for rooms Ran Time requests for lesson periods Time Requests Analysis Time requests can be entered via the master data or the lesson window by clicking on the button lt Time Requests gt For further details please see the chapter Time requests on p 260 Time Requests Tab O Time requests Time requests for teachers Controls the compliance with time requests entered under Mas ter Data Teachers Time requests for classes Controls the compliance with time requests entered under Mas ter Data Classes Time requests for subjects Controls the compliance with time requests entered under Mas ter Data Subjects Time requests for rooms Controls the compliance with time requests entered under Mas ter Data Rooms Time requests for lesson periods Controls the compliance with time requests entered
249. of predefined lists can help you search for input weaknesses and errors caused by time requests Access the lists by clicking on Print or Print Preview in the master data or lesson window Under Print selection a number of different types of lists are available e g teacher teams day requests etc The following example is based on the conflicting period requests of a teacher team As you can see in the figure below printout of teacher teams from Master Data Teachers the only days not blocked for any of the se involved teachers are Thursday and Friday _ A lesson consisting of three single periods could not Type of ist Click ase be scheduled for this teacher team without violating a ValueCorrection Teacher Team 3 time request something the optimisation tool would never do or the single period condition something the optimisation tool might do depending on your weighting Monday Tuesday WVvednes me Eos Name a m p m a m p m a m p m a m p m NS aS settings for conditions such as Avoid errors with double period For further information on teacher teams please see the chapter Teacher teams on p 267 Options An important point is the distinction between must and can The settings 1 1 under Master Data Subjects in the input field Afternoon periods week Min Max on the Timetable tab forces gp Untis to schedule exactly one afternoon period The setting 0 1
250. ol bar functions lseeesseessseesssessseeeen nennen enne nnne nnns 46 Master data properties eeeeeseee serere ee eeee nennen nnn 53 Element independent input fields ccccccsseecceseeseeceeecesseeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeees 53 E ATI e a TT 53 CECR OO CNET Em 54 Element specific input fields cccceeccccsesseceseeecceeeeeeeeuseeeseeeeessaneeesaeeeeesaass 56 POON NEMO E 56 E ESTNE A AIE E EAE A N EEA E AE T ET 57 Tea e E E E E A E sane 62 SUO 6 RENTE E E ee eee ee eee 66 AES er NT AEE A E E EE ERG EEUU 69 Breite M CTUM 69 OIG ONS Sore tine sate orciiantcice E MI DPPEPERIMI M PET CRUS e DENN E IEEE 70 PS SCHON ONNS M CREE T 70 Ara NOS ccena iie tidie seti acces sees y occa sudetececoeseesenssoienesscesne II qur M Ute UU NEUEN 70 School IAG NOY EN ETT 71 Reasons Ol A SINC PITT TO OTT 71 Display Master data cccccccssececcseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeseeseeesaaeeeseaeeeessaeeeeeaees 71 RS cm V 72 The lesson WINOOW TU T TIT 72 Predelined VICW ETT OO TUM 74 ING T E 75 Entering lessons ccccssceccesceceseeceeseeceueecseeeceueessaeecseueessueeecauseseaeessentessees 76 Entering lessons in the grid view isses essen nennen nnns 76 Entering lessons in the form view sssccccccssssceccssseeccnsceeccsnasesecsausessnsusess
251. olved The general rule is the more the better 3 Thetime requests entered for the individual teachers in the team If a number of different time requests need to be taken into consideration the timetable quality will deteriorate as a result since a teacher team can only be scheduled when all the teachers of the team are available In the example above the PE teachers Rub Rubens and Arist Aristotle form the teacher team no 1 You have another teacher team e g team no 4 comprising of teachers Rubens and Hugo scheduled to teach Design Each time team 4 is scheduled team 1 would be blocked since teacher Rubens belongs to both of them You need to decide if teacher team 4 is necessary at all since there already is a teacher team for Design i e team 2 You could also find out if Ruben s team colleague Aristotle is qualified to teach Design as well If so the Design lesson could also be taught by team 1 In any case one teacher team would be eliminated lending a greater flexibility to the optimisation tool As mentioned earlier the CCC analysis is a perfect tool for identifying such problematic compositions see the chapter CCC analysis on p 119 Time requests and teacher teams Time requests are another problematic issue when dealing with teacher teams In an ideal case the individual time requests and especially the blocked periods for teachers in a teacher team should overlap as much as possible
252. on Monday period 7 The scheduling dialogue and the timetable for teachers are automatically synchronized to show this lesson Click onthe period in the scheduling dialogue and drag it away left mouse button Time slots where the lesson can be scheduled are highlighted in green see the scheduling dialogue chapter Scheduling periods on p 173 When the arrow passes over a scheduled period the details of the lesson automatically appear in the period details window For purposes of clarity red arrow markings show the possible slots on the timetable where the lesson can be moved You can see at one glance if the move would be advantageous for classes and or teachers see example on the following page Drop the period in a suitable slot e g Fri 5 by releasing the left mouse button The Scheduling Dialogue 179 Z Scheduling Dialogue m Monday NS Sa Finan m NM i i 1 Cla 3a H EN PEG GA MA BI EN RE oe DENN PEC DE n MA cH DS ps PM DS GA MA EN Tea Cer 1b 3a 1a 2a 2a 3a ie Rs e 3 AR AR DE PEG MA 2a 2b 3a 3b M 2a 2a 2b 3b 3a 3a 3a 3a 3a 3a 3a a 3b 3a 2a Rm a 4 3a 3a 3a 3a 3a Tea Hugo 3b 3b 4 4 2a fa 1a 1a 4 fa 1a 2a 2a Periods marked with the symbol E are available for swapping 180 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Dp Allocate Delete room Example Undo Each planning step carried out in the timetable in the schedulin
253. on tool the optimisation function ignores the rules that gt double periods should be scheduled in the same room P specialist subject rooms should be evenly distributed between classes P the specified room should be allocated in preference to its al ternative room and P thehomeroom should be scheduled when the desired special ist subject room is unavailable Room Logic Changing home rooms for classes and teachers You can change the home rooms for classes and teachers by clicking X i i Woe Mew room gt lesson list on lt Special fu nctions in the All Master Data window Three diffe EON rent options are available The following example demonstrates the Substitute room in lesson list differences between the three options SECUS Entering new home rooms Class 1a has not been assigned a designated home room yet The Example Home room cell in the lesson window of class 1a is therefore empty 35 Master Data Class E E mj xj ini x oE Sg o Class 1b Hewton Class 2a Hugo Hx Ee wv i R pr Subject Class es Subject room Home Room 1a 1b 2a 2b 1a 1a b 1a 1a Doubl Black 5 Arist EN 1a 1 Calas MU 1a 2 Callas AR 1a 141 Enter the room Ria under d Home room for class 1a after 4 Arist FR de 3 Callas MU 1a creating the lesson Use the 2 Cales AR fa 14 function New room lesson eee list to assign room Ria
254. ond column shows the teachers subjects and rooms involved in the lesson The period details window displays one row per individual coupling If the optimisation tool has allocated a different alterna tive room instead of the home room entered for the lesson the name of the home room is shown in brackets The example shows that room Ps1 is the designated home room for the lesson but the actual scheduled room is the alternative room Ria Classes The column displays the class es involved in the active lesson classes 1a and 1b in the example Time The Time column displays time restrictions and or periodicities a particularly important function for use with the Multi Week Timetable module For instance the GA lesson in the example takes place on a fortnightly basis in weeks of type A Students Shows the number of students entered for the lesson or elective subject for use with the Course Scheduling module Lesson 6 on the demo file demo gpn for instance shows the number of students in the individual remedial courses see example on the right Tea Subj Rm Timetable Interaction Cla Time Stud Special text Total Hugo EN R1a Ps1 2a 2b 3a T2 Nobel DE Ps2 2a 2b 3a 7 1 DE 2a 2b 3a 8 62 Special text The column Special text contains the text or the description ente red for the lesson and the text entered in the lesson details window Lesson 6 on the
255. opriate cell and press the lt Delete gt key gt Ensure that the option Activate double click on the Example Customise tab under Settings Miscellaneous is activated gt Double click on the element R1a in the element roll up The room H1a appears in the field last activated i e under Room of class 1a also see the figure on the following page Cancel Help 24 gp Untis Standard Package All Elements Entering data via double click te ma f ymnasium Physics lab Chemistry lab Click Cli T JEO O N Home Econ room ga 31a Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room 2a Class Room 2b Master Data Class Dy iir Eng 8 a EET ae n Class Teacher Room tee Ease DOE Css Teacher Wm zT AUTE ET Name Fulnam Room i Eu Main subj day iy Ps2 Pseudo Room 2 4 Fla Clas 1a Gauss 4 1b Class 1b Newton iS 8a Class 2a Hugo 1 2 4 E amp b Class 2b Andersen 1 2 4 Z 3a Class 3a Aristoteles 1 2 4 Z 3b Class 3b Callas 1 2 4 Z 4 Class 4 Nobel 1 3 4 Z 2 Entering data by selecting from the element list You can also enter data using the drop down list Example gt Click on the Room cell in the row for class 1a gt Open the drop down list and select the room R1a g Master Data Class O By ay e lads X DeFaultLight Lo oem me ser sar Name Full name Room Test
256. ore individual rooms during the timetable comparison Detailed comparison for couplings Activate this option if you only want to see the timetable differences for the elements of the selected coupling row but not for all the elements of the selected lesson Classes ignore changes in couplings This option is only available when the previous option is active If the timetable changes involve classes only the changes are only displayed on the class timetables of the classes affected by the changes During a timetable comparison gp Untis is started a second time The next three settings concern the arrangement of the two windows Comparison without window arrangement Select this option if you want to arrange the two windows manually Tile horizontally Select this option if you want gp Untis to arrange the original timetable at the top and the modified version at the bottom Tile vertically Select this option if you want gp Untis to arrange the original timetable on the left and the modified version on the right The selected window arrangement is not fixed and you can manually change the arrangement at any time As soon as you close the second window the original gp Untis timetable reverts to its former state e g full screen Timetable Comparison If you have two monitors connected to your computer Windows 98 or later you can display the two versions on two separate screens Layout 2 HTML Changed Periods
257. ormat Open the Print selection window via Print or Print Preview to enter further print settings The settings only apply to the selected Print selection timetable format Selecting timetables Print selection En X Per default the software will always print the timetable 11 Deals displayed on the screen Select several timetables of SEEN TIUS the same format to be printed at the same time by Background clicking on lt Selection gt Using the mouse select the timetables of individual elements by holding S down the left mouse button and highlighting the desired d els elements or by using the shortcut key Ctrl left mouse Callas click see example Rubens Cervantes select All Lurie Allows you select all the elements select Marked elements All essen Allows you to select all the elements marked with the Al Marked Inverse specific code marked under master data Cancel 242 gp Untis Standard Package Printing Inverse Allows you to mark all the elements not selected useful for print selection involving two different groups of elements such as part time and full time teachers Department Allows you to print out the teacher timetables of a particular department Details individual timetables Click on Details under Print selection to access further printout options The settings options vary depending on the timetable format
258. ot be displaced from its home room Room Logic o Other element in period Scheduling Timetable Rep Weighting Optimisation Optimised Timetables Room Optimisation k Diagnosis CCC Analvsis Overall Diagnosis Scheduling Dialogue Scheduling Timetable Delete the Timetable Break Supervisions Room Optimisation E v Optimise locked periods v Optimise off site periods v Take room capacity into consideration Start Room Optimisation N 285 286 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic After the room optimisation run the situation is very different Class 1a is back in its home room on Tuesday period 4 and 5 and on Saturday period 4 Instead class 3b occupies room R1a on Monday period 4 when class 1a is scheduled to have a PE lesson in the sports hall Class 4 is scheduled in R1a on Saturday period 5 because again the room is not required by class 1a Any periods not yet allocated to a suitable room as is often the case for classes without a designated room can be assigned manually using the scheduling dialogue Finally two frequently asked questions When is the best time to start the room optimisation Start the room optimisation after you have finished scheduling periods but before you start allocating rooms manually if at all What is the difference between the optimisation and the room optimisation tool when it comes to room allocation In contrast to the room optimisati
259. oups C1 Mand C1 Sonly when class C1 i e the core class is not scheduled to have lessons The examples on the left and below and the following explanations demonstrate the situation in a German Realschule 09C 7L Cla DHR EldED x amp vm Le COR aa 98 Cl Te Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Double pers C 4 200 18 1 18 11 E 5 4 Log R SC EN L15 ROSC 04 L48 of 3 4 1 2 2 8 4 2 eso E L47 Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Male Female Linetext Stat Code s Line value Linetext 2 1 MEN Sz 094 096 F_IF 2 L20 TA 094 098 H R2 ROSA 3 L37 TE D34 03B H TB 4 L27 TH D34 096 AULA 094 096 H R1 Take a look at year 9 Each student of this year is assigned to one of the core classes 09A 09B or 09C and attends undifferentiated core class lessons Each class is therefore marked with the class group code 1 The classes O9fs O9ti highlighted in light green full name Course in the above figure are the differentiation groups fs French ti IT Each student of core classes 09A 09C can choose one of the elective subject groups O9fs O9ti Each class group is marked with the class group code 2 Please note when using class groups that the order in which classes are listed under Master Data Classes is not arbitrary Core and differentiation classes of any one year must be listed in sequence i e one below the other A class group coded with a clas
260. ow independent from the active window 3 lt Click on Classes Core Time Violations The details window displays all the classes where core time violations occur and details on which periods are involved O Click on one of the details in the details window The accompanying timetable changes to the selected class where the relevant period is highlighted in a different colour As shown on the timetable in the example you can also display the relevant time requests Please see the chapter User defined views under Timetable display on p 219 for further information 3 Timetable diagnosis New diagnosis Refresh list Data analysis 3 Minimum weighting 0 4 Only show report totals gt 0 25 09 2006 v 29 9 2006 Diagnosis Subj 1 day imposs with preferred room Less double pers Non sched pers m TUN LunchBreak foo short Too many NTP s Half day requ Off site rooms Consecutive pers One per half day Subj room missing Aw amp CO CO CO CO CO amp CO CO CO x Ca M9 0 CO OD M9 M CUI 3 weighting not respected 3 time TRA Lunchbreak too short Lunchbreak too long Periods with no room Subject twice a day Double per solit un Class es 18 3 2006 30 6 2007 21 Periods week 3 Unscheduled pers C Timetable Level L Mo Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud 3 144 gp Untis Standard Package
261. ows you to suppress this behaviour by activating the option Window in the background under Settings When this function is activated and you want to bring the scheduling dialogue to the front click on the blue title bar Although initially an unfamiliar thing to do activating the window in the ackgro d offer a number of a antages For instance you can cover a part of the scheduling dialogue with a timetable window displaying the timetable of the cursor selected element in the scheduling dialogue Vice versa the scheduling dialogue always displays the currently active master data element or lesson or diagnosis item even when the scheduling dialogue is in the background The Scheduling Dialogue 171 Open the file demo gpn Example O Open the scheduling dialogue and activate it in the background via the option Window in the background under Settings Open the window Lessons Classes and the window Timetable Classes Place the cursor in the grid view of the lesson window and scroll from one lesson to the next using the cursor keys M and v Click on different periods on the timetable ff Scheduling Dialogue 4 3b 2a 2a os 4 1a 1a 2a 1a 1a 1a 1a 3b 3a 3a sla 4a 2a 2a 4 2a 3b 4 3b 4 1a 4 1a 1a 2a 1a 1a 1a 1a 3b 3a Ja 1a EE 3b 4 Be Ri fis 1a ich 1a 1a 1a 4 3 Class la Class la Gauss t Cla ji Class la Gauss t Cla ne ABD x ETE AI o
262. p P SH1 5H2 SH2 ia Hal 4 5H2 SH1 Gym PE AIEE HEI Ria Rib md R2a R2a R2b R2b R3a R3a Ria Ps R1a Ps2 R2a LIEN 4 MMMM nO PO PRO A w Sorting data in columns gt Sort the data in a column by clicking on the heading in the column you wish to sort gt Click again and the data in the column will be sorted in descending order 3 Master Data Room Name Altern room Rm Weight Full name Bi x ESL TI es Foam Subject po Sports Hall 1 Sports Hall 2 Gymnasium Physics lab Chemistry lab Home Econ room Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room 2a Class Room 2b Class Room 3a Pseudo Room 1 3b Pseudo Room 2 4 MMMM PO PO PO 4 C Co RB 3 Master Data Class ILE 322 Hugo 2l o 2b Andersen mE Class 3a Aristoteles 3b Class 3b Callas 4 Class 4 Nobel LIEN 4 Please note that sorting only has a temporary effect After closing and re opening the window the data will again be sorted in the original order Printouts show the sort order displayed on the screen at the time of printing Hiding Showing columns You can hide or show individual columns in the grid P Place the cursor in the selection button row i e between tool bar and data grid gt Right click to call up the context menu g Master Data Room Right click v Text
263. panen Inactive la fv Timetable compwnon Only modified timetables Active Example The following list summarises the different items you can compare P Different files i e timetables saved under different names gt Different school weeks of the same file Open the same file in both gp Untis versions and select two different weeks from the timetable display P Different terms of the same file for use with the Multiple Term Timetable module P Changes to the current work file since the file was last saved The second timetable must have the same format and the same number of columns and rows as the first an important factor when comparing timetables from different files Select the desired option and click on Yes to start gp Untis a second time The two versions will be arranged as specified You may have to move the navigation bar to the bottom or the right window edges to be able to view the entire timetable The second version also displays a timetable The two timetable versions communicate with each other and exchange information During this process the traffic light situated next to the timetable comparison combo box is green When the timetable comparison function is active the two timetables are synchronised This means that you can scroll from class to class in one of the two timetables and the other timetable automatically scrolls to the same class Move the cursor from period to period and the se
264. pper left corner of the image should be located with respect to the left or upper margin of the timetable Use the Size fields to specify the size of the printed image Tick the box Keep aspect ratio to prevent distorting the image gp Untis calculates the dimensions of the image from the most recently entered value and the aspect ratio of the image Validfrom 10 October Fordemoandtest only Tea Diaa Bitmap c Program Files gp Untis Gpes bmp Browse Callas Maria Position aaa 82 Horizontal distance from left mm 5 Vertical distance from top mm Size 14 Width rm 20 Height mm v Keep aspect ratio Cancel Open Bitmap S opniezodz Delo Dorae Tod eon DEMO 26 os 17 2 Y Gruber amp Petters Software 250 gp Untis Standard Package Printing Header and footer The following example shows the different display options for headers and footers Licence line 1 and 2 unchangeable Date and time az taken fram the settings on the Pc Schad rama s achool DEMO Version of the programme unchangesble EN bi lu Tensa DEA TY diem 10 Heber Settings Miscellaneous eee lanma ie Settings Re art Sethngs Eiai P HTHL lireteki e dices Direc Header Pint names Tine able verion aad Vaid Iran 10 October e Piet date e Print current tiga il Hs LR F e Paint page rumbers uu E RE K Calla
265. ption ensures a high level of compliance with the specifications entered under Periods per day min max Max consec prds D Activating this option ensures a high level of compliance with the specifications entered under Max consec periods half day These are in half day blocks Subjects Subject Timetable Values Subs Subject Group Alias name Subject ab V M Main subject Deduction F Fringe period 2 More than once a day 0 Optional subject G Not a fringe period Double periods BD Respect double periods E Double pers span breaks FP No break supervision before after Subject group When entering teaching qualifications for teachers you can either enter single subjects or entire subject groups This field is therefore only relevant for use with the Lesson Planning and Value Calculation module Alias name For certain purposes e g data export it may be desirable to use standardized designations instead of the usual names Alias names can be entered via the relevant element or under Master Data Alias Names A In all classes This field is only important in connection with the module Lesson planning and value calculation M Main subject Tick this box to categorize a subject as a main subject For further details please see the chapter Main subjects on p 295 under User tips F Fringe period Tick this option to categorize a subject as a
266. put selection ue e tret dtd etie naa eR IR ERR ud e AE aane Sape bd gus 25 The master data views T TT 26 Standard US RR Omm 26 Vid seio cue sissresneisispeesinscsnn osinn e ar rea naian a Eiana NEET aR S 27 mieu c VICTUS 28 Slandard VIEWS T 28 Including views in the menu ccccscecccccseseeecnsceeeecansusecessuusesensuseeessuauescessunsssssanes 30 CUSIOMISING existing VIEWS ssseisierosi ue eret akt cde sh rtibe tuin ptp cie netu bn ser dY DXX pax Eas E suas aE 30 Customising displayed data fields ccccsssseeccsececcceeecesssseeeseeeceseesessuaseesseeseeess 30 MOVING COINS E 31 SON d e NER 32 Creating a new view for teachers seeeesssssseseeeeeeeeenen enne nnns 34 Including new views in the menu eese 35 PGE gueros TOG NOM seresa 36 Using the query function MMME 36 mine T E E E 39 Entering new elements esseesssseseseeeeeeee nnne nennen nennen nnn nn nnn nis 42 4 gp Untis Standard Package Contents Moving elements llsseeesseeeseeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnne nnne nnne nn nnn nra nnns 43 Delelngelete ils ao aescenena tiri sciis Cum E CM VEU Eaa SUN aiK i ETNE Ani 44 Changing element names sessssssssessseeeeenn nennen nnns 44 Data exchange via the clipboard i sicossksavecseskxtrabekstessxa nr xS E dE iPE vi een Tak arv ead 45 The to
267. put weaknesses or even errors Errors and input weaknesses are described in greater detail below The following example provides a brief introduction to the percentage planning function Open the file demo2 gpn O Delete all timetables via the menu item Scheduling Delete the Timetable An information window appears Click on OK Carry out a timetable optimisation run via Diagnostic Tools Scheduling Optimisation and enter the value 30 in the field of periods to be scheduled zi Class es Y 11 Periods week O Display the timetable for class 1a Timetable Classes Time range 18 3 2006 30 6 2007 The timetable for class 1a should correspond approximately to the timetable shown in the example on the right There may be slight variations in display depending on the software version you are using As mentioned before the percentage applies to the entire school and not to individual classes The example shows that more than 5096 of the periods for class 1a have been scheduled The software would No Tea Subj Rm Cla Tirr peSituda ecial tex have scheduled proportionately fewer periods for other ose in S Teetrolog classes The high percentage of scheduled periods ure eL indicates that the lessons of class 1a are more difficult to schedule than the lessons of other classes Q Cl
268. r Master Data Classes define a core class C1 and two Master Data differentiation groups C1 M Modern Languages and C1 S Classes Sciences Classes Cla Lessons of core class C1 involves all of the students of the class while lessons of History differentiation groups involve only the Seouranhy Eg students belonging to the particular group 3 Differentiation Group Sciences L Cla Classes Subject room 2 3 274 gp Untis Standard Package Class Groups The classes of a Realschule in Germany f Classes Cla SEE Mt DO x amp 416 Name Full name Cl Grp No 08A 1 F 08B oec 08D O8fs O08nb sw oste D8ti 094 098 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 Under Master Data Classes enter the information that the class groups C1 M and C1 S consist of students from core class C1 using the Class group code 1 meaning that the class is a core class numbers greater than 1 2 9 refer to the different class groups W Classes Cla C1 hM Differentiation Group Modern Languages 2 C1_3 Ditferentiation Group Sciences Please note that the same class group code must be entered for both class groups C1 Mand C1 S amp S Use higher code numbers only when the students in your school can choose more than one elective course group Entering the correct codes instructs the software to schedule lessons for class gr
269. r the off site rooms Room Logic Example Subject sequence code 293 294 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic Note 1 Scheduling Dialogue To ensure the correct treatment of off site rooms during optimisation enter the following details Under Master Data Rooms P Off site code gt Room weighting Under Scheduling Weighting Rooms gt Optimisation of room allocation gt Optimisation of the off site rooms Periods scheduled for rooms with off site code 1 are marked y and Y in the scheduling dialogue Periods scheduled for rooms with other off site codes are marked z and Z upper case letters denote couplings z S Wednesday roe Friday i 2 3 is s r le N 2 4 5 t i TT y o z The scheduling dialogue with different off site markers Main subjects Subjects that are considered particularly strenuous or important for students can be marked with the Main subject code This allows the optimisation tool to observe the following restrictions gt Maximum number of main subjects that may be scheduled for a class per day gt Maximum number of main subjects that may be scheduled in sequence for a class gt Maximum number of main subjects that may be scheduled to take place after a defined boundary period To ensure the correct treatment of main subjects during optimisation enter the following details Under Weighting Main Subjects P Re
270. r 1a STUDIO Subject room Home Room Male Line text Stat Codefs Line STUDIO The function Modified room gt lesson list replaces the home room H1a with the room STUDIO for the lessons of class 1a but only for those lessons which have R1a entered as their home room Overwriting home rooms After some time you decide to replace the home room STUDIO from the previous example with the room PSEUDOROOM for all the lessons of class 1a including coupled lessons Use the function Substitute room in lesson list to allocate PSEUDOROOM as the new home room for all the lessons of class 1a i e not only to empty cells compare the function New room gt lesson list or to cells containing a specific room Modified room gt lesson list Ed Master Data Class Ini xl Example Room Logic Class 2a Hugo Class 2b Andersen 1a 1b 2a 2b 1a 1a1b 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a 1a Teacher Subject Class es Subject room Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Codefs Line GEc 1a 1b 2a 2b 289 290 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic Off site rooms Off site rooms are specialist subject rooms and classrooms located at such a distance from the main school building that a whole period needs to be set aside to allow teachers and students to reach the rooms The automated optimisation function takes the length of the walking time
271. r any element Use this code for certain functions such as for printing timetables or master data or for the Serial change function when you want to identify selected elements for processing see figure on the following page xi Name Full name jf Teachers Tea Z Teachers Tea 5 ux Kids Dx eaae Name Fullname Marked m get NTPs Consec pers ig 3 Cervantes Gauss D 0 5 i Curie Newton Hugo Andersen Aristoteles Callas Li 0 1 6 Rubens Cervantes asset All Department om a All 4 Marked Inverse OK Cancel Type of list cadi Data fields ine OK Cancel Help Ignore i Lessons containing an element marked Ignore will be ignored on the timetable i e they will not be scheduled or displayed on the timetable The hourly value of such lessons however will be included in the calculation of the total value for teachers and classes Certain import export interfaces may refuse to export elements marked Ignore Lock X Lessons containing a locked element will be frozen on the timetable i e the lessons will not be moved during subsequent optimisation runs Don t Print N Do not print When an element is marked Don t Print N the timetables and lesson overviews for this element will not be printed Time Requests Z This field is non editable The tick appears automatically as soon as a
272. r data This chapter describes the input and maintenance of master data and provides a detailed description of the master data properties gp Untis master data are basic input details essential for the construction of school timetables Master data includes the details of teachers classes classrooms and subjects which are used to form the lessons in the timetable but also other important information such as holiday dates and data on departments and alternative rooms You can enter new master data or modify existing master data via the menu item Master Data in the main tool bar by clicking on the appropriate submenu Greyed out items such as the menu item Students in the figure above refer to optional functions that are currently inactive This is usually the case when the use of the option requires the correct licence details of an additional gp Untis software module For example use of the Students function requires the purchase and installation of the Student Timetable or the Course Planning module The example above contains a number of entries below the menu item Display Master Data not included in the default display of the standard software package The chapter Master data views describes how to customise menus and include the items you require The master data categories Classes Teachers Rooms and Subjects are particularly important as they are the main building blocks for the construction of the lessons
273. r teacher teams gp Untis provides a Teacher team list where you can view all teacher teams at a glance Access the list via one of the two following options 1 Click on Print or Print Preview in the CCC Analysis window or 2 Selectthe relevant print list from the Print selection dialogue under Master Data Teachers Couplings Important e Print Preview a Print 267 268 gp Untis Standard Package Couplings Method 1 provides direct access to the list of teacher teams Using method 2 you first need to open the Print Prints XI selection dialogue by clicking on lt Print gt or E Bae lt Print Preview gt in an active master data window Seion Laou for teachers Fage setu TS NU Click on the selection window Type of list to 7 obtain a list of all print lists available in Data fields Y Day time requests Monthly statement connection with teacher master data Select the Period lime requests Hep list Teacher teams the Selection button a normally used to select individual teachers is uela irrelevant for the Type of list function and is Unspecified day requests ValueCorrection therefore greyed out Weekly values The following figure shows an example of such a list The printout shows 1 The total number of different teams The general rule is the ner quM aay EWE E HON 2 Thelessons including details in which a team is inv
274. rag amp Drop The row marker gt Click on the row you want to move The row marker appears in the first grey cell of the row 8S Master Data Room gt Click on the row marker hold down the left mouse button and drag the row to the desired position A horizontal line shows the position of the row during Drag amp Drop gt Drop the row in the desired position by releasing the mouse button EU Master Data Room gf Master Data Room ff Master Data Room Sports Hall 1 Gymnazium Physics lab Chemistry lab P SHI Gym 7E T ii n 14 gp Untis Standard Package Example a Gym Gymnasium PL Physics lab Chemistry lab Home Econ room Ria Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room 2a R2b Class Room 2b R3a Class Room 3a Rib R2a R2b R3a Rla Pseudo Room 1 3b Ria Ps2 Pseudo Room 2 4 R2a All Elements Moving columns Change the order of columns using the same method You want to move the column Full Name to the right of the column Room Weighting gt Click on the heading of the column you want to move and keep the left mouse button held down gt Drag the column to the desired position in the grid A vertical line shows the position of the column during Drag amp Drop gt Drop the column in the desired position by releasing the mouse button 7 x DeFaultLight E aia 2E EE mw m feat Ten Dr ro
275. ramme you should initially use only the fields displayed by default in the grid view Progress to the timetable defining special options only after you have gained some experience in the use of the optimisation tool and even then use the options sparingly The lesson window The lesson window is a view in its own right This means that the general details on window management set out in the chapter Mas ter data views apply equally to the lesson window Open the standard views of lessons sorted by class or teacher via the menu items Lessons Classes or Lessons Teachers respectively 5 Class 1a Gauss L Cla E ni xj e ROK v m ole CLOG ias and Toolbar m For element Lessons Timetable Codes Values ld am Periods week Hl Alias name 1 Subject Group isc Huge Teacher Room Students M 3 Gee Subject Ris Home Room i Students F Lesson number n fiatb 2a2 Class es Les Groups fo Total Form View A ES E Students Min Division No Statistical Code zz ee Text I Student Course Description Line text Time requests CI Te Line text 2 Per Teacher Subject Class es Subject roo Home Room Double per Block Teache MN OY NM PR OF oo CO M I 12 1022 2b Grid view DE 1a BI Subjex Classes Subjec Home Room Male Female Line text _ Stat Coc Line value Linetext 2 Teachei Teacher allocat GEc 1a 1b 2
276. re or after the block see example Schedule the half period before the block 3 1a Class 1a Gauss Timetable Glat 15 x A ia Time range a e zd Classies 17 3 2007 30 5 2008 al 5 oj Se x a 6 Lessons 11 Ta 7 Time Mo 1 oA Whole period 8 Half per prior to block Half period after block a ae Stud Special text Cluster Scheduling Half Periods 201 Scheduling half periods using the scheduling dialogue Open the file Demo4 gpn and de schedule all periods via Example Scheduling Delete the Timetable O Select the unscheduled lesson 73 from the Unscheduled tab Schedule the lesson for Wed 7 by double clicking or by clicking on the button A dialogue window will appear where you can select which part of the period you want lesson 73 to occupy 1 half period 2 half period whole period Scheduling Dialogue 20 9 2007 30 6 2008 PEG PEB fa vum GEc E p 1a Hugo GEc 2 5 1a Ander DS 1a Arist 2nd half period Cancel Select the whole period A whole period of the lesson will be scheduled Now you need to schedule an additional half period Schedule the half period in period 8 You will be asked if you want the lesson to be scheduled in the first or the second half of the period 202 go Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Select 1
277. re the order of the master data can be changed by Drag amp Drop you can change the order of the views by clicking on the first grey column of a view in this case the Name column and drag it to the desired location The following functions are available via the tool bar buttons F Opens the Grid Adjustment dialogue of the active view D Creates a new view Opens the selected view dh Deletes the selected view Tip Tip 29 30 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views Including views in the menu When ticking the box for a view other than the standard view the full name of the view is displayed at the end of the master data menu allowing you to open the view via this menu item Customising existing views Example Customise existing views quickly and easily to suit your individual requirements The following examples demonstrate how to do this Customising displayed data fields You can specify which data fields should be displayed in the grid gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt Open the view Tea A gt Click on Grid Adjustment on the tool bar of the view Tea A Grid The grid adjustment dialogue appears on the screen Initially all the Adjustment options in the column Active are activated Select the options you wish to display in your view by unticking the boxes you want to deactivate or by highlighting adjacent fields and clicking on lt Inactive gt Confirm your selection
278. rectories Timetable Customise Value Calculation Wamings included on all printouts see the Timetable version chapter Timetable fs CO nstru ctio n j on p 2 50 v Detailed comparison for couplings Classes ignore changes in couplings The different options for timetable 2 E NNUS s ile horizontally comparisons are described in Sie vei the chapter Timetable v Synchronise dates com pariso ns V When switching terms set the TT to the beginning of the term v Activate Drag amp Drop in the timetables The Synchronise dates option allows you to specify if a date change implemented on one particular timetable should also apply to all other timetables open Note on the screen This function is particularly useful for use with the Multi Week Timetable and the Multiple Term Timetable modules Cancel Help The option When switching terms set the TT to the beginning of the term is only active for use with the Multiple Term Timetable module The last option Activate Drag amp Drop in the timetables allows you to activate or deactivate the manual timetabling function Licence Data The input of licence data is described in detail in the brochure gp Untis Getting Started 260 gp Untis Standard Package Time Requests Time Requests eo Time requests Time requests are an important element of the gp Untis timetabling software Time requests can be entered for master data elements and for lessons The
279. rench FR should not be scheduled in sequence for class 3a Enter the letter A in the column Subject sequence Classes see example To ensure the correct treatment of subject sequences during optimisation enter the following details Under Scheduling Weighting Teachers P Respect subject sequence Teachers and or Under Scheduling Weighting Classes P Respect class sequence Classes Under Scheduling Weighting Subjects gt Subject sequence classes or teachers Or Under Lesson P Subject sequence classes or teachers Class Clash Code CCC Z Class 3a Aristoteles L Cla Subject Sequences 299 i NNN NN PN Callas Ander Arist Callas Gauss Gauss New Hugo Ander Ander Nobel Rub Rub Cer Cer Nobel Cer Curie Gauss New CH DS PEG AR 2a 2b 3a 3b PL 3a 3b SH2 3a 3b Teachers classes and rooms should never be double booked A possible exception are lessons attended by only some of the students of a class The students of class 1a attend either Choir or Orchestra but Example 1 none of the students attend both Enter the same numerical CCC for both lessons permitted values 1 9 e g 5 to instruct the gp Untis optimisation algorithm that the lessons Choir and Orchestra may be scheduled at the same time but that this is not compulsory see example on the following page 300 gp Untis Standard Package Subject Sequences
280. ring a lesson number you can use the input field to search for a particular lesson by entering a combination of details classes teachers and or subjects involved separated by a comma gt Entering 1a DE will display the lessons of subject DE for class 1a gt Entering Arist 1b will display the first lesson teacher Aristotle teaches to class 1b The period details window The bottom part of the scheduling dialogue shows information pertaining to the active lesson compare the similar function of the lesson details window on the timetable For further details on the functions please see the chapter Timetable display on p 210 As you can see lesson 11 is a coupled lesson involving classes 1a 1b 2a and 2b and teacher Hugo The subject GEc is scheduled to take place in room Ria he Scheduling Dialogue L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Specialtext Cluster 41 Hugo GEc Rta 1a 1b 2a 2b The middle part of the window contains details on all the classes teachers and rooms Involved in the active lesson for the entire week Period availability Lesson 11 is scheduled to take place on Wednesday period 1 and Saturday period 4 as shown by the symbol in the first row lesson row and the symbol O for all elements involved in the lesson see example on the following page An empty cell in the grid denotes an available period for scheduling an element teacher class or room for example Fri 5 for cl
281. riods This option can be used to avoid splitting double periods or to force the software to schedule single periods Master Data Properties Input block for double periods 67 68 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties Please note thatthe correct treatment of double periods requires an appropriate input under option Double periods Min Max gt This option is only effective when used sparingly and thoughtfully since it imposes considerable restrictions on the optimisation function especially with regard to subjects with many double periods Activate this function only when a previous optimisation run was unable to achieve the desired outcome and you have already increased the relevant weighting parameter Avoid errors with double periods to 5 E Double periods are allowed to span breaks Breaks marked with an asterisk must not be bridged by double periods and will therefore affect the distribution of double periods If this restriction is undesirable for a particular subject simply untick this option ValueCorrection Subs Break Supervision Teacher Timetable Values Teach qua Weekly values Home room short name L Lunch break NTP Timetable Tab 2 Lunch break Min Max H Sched a m p m not both K loadi tt 5 Periods day Min Max D Kaap cur loading pattem Very important 0 3 N Min M ee ee NoNTP s A Max consec periods half day Lunch break B D
282. rs and click on lt Serial Change gt 4 Serial Change gt In the input block Time Requests click on xj Delete Gauss Current Content New Content You have deleted the time requests for all classes Whole File Selection Only The input block Time Requests also contains a Delete N N Cancel lt Change gt button that can be used to modify the Change JA Hep C o time requests for allthe selected elements of a view Proceed as follows gt Start gp Untis and load the file demo2 gpn gt Open the master data view for classes gt Open the time request window for class 1a 264 gp Untis Standard Package Time Requests E Serial Change EU Time Requests Cla 46 la pm Class 1a Gauss LInspecified day requests Requested peas 3 7 3 4 o Lnspecified blocks jo Number of days SHE riday TEES I bibere i bcr rei eid i i Seats E ETA i i Core Times gt Enter the time request 3 for Mon Sat period 5 Classes Cla P Select all classes in the master data window p Click on Serial c 4 Nobel Change gt In the input block Time Requests click on lt Change gt SERES Curent Content Mew Content whale File Selection Only Time Regue Delete o Cancel Change N m Halves m EC ET The time requests for all the selected classes will be modified to reflect
283. s Off site codes Off site rooms are classrooms and specialist subject rooms not located in the main building of the school but at an external site too distant to reach within the space of a normal break Enter the values 1 to 9 for off site locations with start time graduation and the values A to E for off site locations without start time graduation Further details on the off site function can be found in the chapter Off site rooms on p 290 Room capacity Hoom capacity Here you can enter the maximum student capacity for a particular room Please read the chapter Room capacity on p 280 under User tips before using the room capacity function Dept Department Rooms may be allocated to a specific department These details are largely for information only and allow printouts of timetables and or room lists to be produced for individual departments Corridor Break superv Here you can enter up to two corridors for a particular room These fields are only useful in connection with the additional module Break Supervision Classes The input fields for classes are categorised in tabs Depending on the number of additional modules you have installed the number of tabs displayed for master data elements may differ from the examples shown in this manual Master Data Properties 57 58 go Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties Class Timetable Values m Students 16 Male 2 Female 28 Stud
284. s of a class To enable students with free periods to come to school later or leave the school earlier than normal hours free periods are preferentially scheduled at the beginning or end of half days An associated term is fringe period subject Free and fringe period subjects can have different weighting settings Single period A subject taught no more than once a day to one particular class Subject room A room in which particular lessons should preferentially be taught e g the music room for teaching music Untis mode Asynonym for working with the Timetable module compare Cover mode working with the Cover Planning module View In gp Untis every window with a data display is a view Please see section The master data views on p 26 for details on how to modify views searching sorting etc 310 gp Untis Standard Package Glossary Index Symbole amp scheduling dialogue 166 2 subject more than once day 67 96 A in all classes 66 B lock conditionally 95 D respect double periods 67 95 E double periods span breaks 68 94 F fringe period 67 F lessons not on adjacent days 61 G not in a fringe period 67 94 H schedule a m or p m not both 61 65 k exempt from data analysis 94 K no alternative room to be used 94 L not in legend 97 L lunch break 2 NTP 61 65 M main subject 66 m marked 93 O optional subject 67 94 P NTPs allowed 61
285. s PE German German Mathematics German Geography a Arist Ruben Ruben Arist Ruben SH Rib Rib Religious Ed Girls PE Geography a Mobel Arist Rib 11 Timetable optimisation The following chapter describes the timetable optimisation function and the diagnosis tools used before and after an optimisation run The optimisation tool of the gp Untis timetabling software manages the entire automated process of constructing a timetable It consists of two main elements the placement run and the swap run The programme starts with an empty time grid and proceeds to fill the grid with periods Since this alone would not necessarily produce the best results the constructed timetable then undergoes a series of specific period swaps to improve the final outcome In the end the weighting settings you have specified will determine the actual quality of the timetable An apt comparison is the board game Nine Men s Morris where two players place individual pieces on an empty board before attempting to improve their positions by strategically moving the pieces across the board Of course the placements and swaps initiated by the programme are not done at random Each violation of one of the specifications you have entered e g the maximum number of periods per day incurs a penalty point With the help of the weighting settings the software proceeds to re evaluate the penalty points until it arrives at a value for the entire timetable This
286. s WiNdOW M TT 142 Overall diagNOS S NER 144 MANUAL TIMETABLING eeeseee ree nennen nnn 146 Scheduling periods in the timetable 146 eese 146 Locking FOCUS ccusecet acus rna opor aed i enera E ama LOU INL C LEE Raninin isnt 149 Moving De TOS ssena n venti amissus aida S Lula CUPRUM UR ER EN DUE 150 Swapping TIO TEE TT E ETT 152 Scheduling periods with clashes ccccscccceeecceeeeceeeeeceeeesseeeeneeeessseeesenees 152 All calng roots ssscaxcci surissixseddbcuacrvndat indian eaua russa Exe Ersa I UNDC ZUM UE 153 The scheduling timetable eese esee 154 Scheduling periods MMNE 155 LOCKING PONOS rera eE TM 157 Swapping periods csccccsecceeeccceeccececsseceaeecasecesnecaeceseaeseeeeseeeseeeesaseesenees 157 Scheduling periods with conflicts cccccccsececeeeeeceeeeceeeeeceeeecseeessseeeseaees 159 Deleting periodS P EE 160 a ejes TOONS EET TE TE EOE 160 Brom 163 The Scheduling Dialogue iocos Ieri eoque pex due erba wen cu Casu ae cu eic pA xD Re Deup Rus 164 The input field M MRNNONERRERR 164 Ecce SON E M AE 164 The period details window cccccccssccsceceeeceeccueeceeecueceueseuesaeeseeeceeeceessans 1
287. s group code smallerthan that of the class listed immediately above denotes the beginning of a new totally separate class sequence with completely different details see the example above e g between O8ti and OYA or between O9ti and 10A Lessons of classes coded with a class group code are marked as such in the scheduling dialogue See the example below f Scheduling Dialogue gt a o 5 ik 69 9 GME E Lessons peryg e 4 Unschedule i i i FO 4 Information History Chained swaps 21 7 2004 EE EE EET EHE DR Class Groups Important Friday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday ee MENS NEN H ee 2 2 2 2 L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Specialtex Cluster 1 2 5 2 6 gp Untis Standard Package Class Groups Overview of core and differentiation lessons The symbol 212 on Tuesday period 6 in the row of class 09A means that a class with the same class group code 1 is scheduled at the same time For this reason a lesson should be scheduled for class OYA in this period if possible Tuesday period 1 contains the symbol 2 This means that a lesson has already been scheduled for a class with the class group code 2 and that it is not possible to schedule a lesson for class 09A at this time without creating a clash Please also note that the additional class row for O9ti which has a different class group code from that of class 09A shows the complementary entries to class 09A
288. s not permitted to schedule lessons out of the range of already allocated lessons and NTP s This function should be used for timetable changes where the non contact periods of teachers and classes should remain unchanged to ensure that extracurricular activities are not affected by the new timetable This function imposes considerable restrictions on subsequent optimisation runs and should not be activated lightly Master class TT print out Enter the same master class for type separated class components if you want to print the timetable together in a single timetable Please see the chapter Type separated class components on p 270 under User tips and the chapter Several classes on one timetable onp 251 under Timetable display for further details Teachers ValueCorrection Subs Break Supervision Teacher Timetable Values Teach qual Weekly values pr Title Alias name l Mae Teacher Tab Car Friedrich First name Birthdate Female P Personnel number Regular school Oo Teacher status 1 Department s gauss teachere E Mail address f o Hourly Rate Telephone number Pers No 2 Mobile number Title This field is for information only and only affects printing and export First name Enter the first name of the teacher gp Untis uses this information on a variety of different printouts Personnel number Enter the personnel staff number only if this is required on printouts or
289. s the three worst periods in each timetable again with their respective values Click on one of the three periods in the list to display the causes of the bad result under Reason When you have an accompanying timetable open at the same time the period is displayed immediately Please note that when you first open the overall diagnosis window or click on Refresh and before you click on any of the periods the cause displayed under Reason always refers to the first period in the row Diagnostic Tools 145 The example shows that the overall xi diagnosis tool detected a split double 52e 2j mes i Penalty points total 54 386 period Click on the entry in the overall Schoolweek2 Penalty points ttl Pint diagnosis window to highlight the period lm The 3 worst periods l in the accompanying timetable The Points UnSe 1 Points 2 Ponts Reason 5 Web 1000 we 1000 Th5 6 Double period split up other periods of this subject in this fi 3 Th 620 Th4 620 Th5 NTPs g 6 We 1000 Mo 4 Double period split up Case only one other period on Friday 8 Click We 3 645 Fr 5 Subject twice a day are also highlig hted 8 We3 172 Tht 128 We Double period split up m Mo f 1000 Mo 5 Double period split up FrS 195 Double period split up The problem can be resolved by increasing the weighting of point Avoid errors with double periods by one level An empty field under Reason
290. scription v Description Teacher Class Class E subject Teacher Teacher Room Subject Subject ie C Room Room a Teacher Lesson Table Lessons tat s k Subject Clic cms v O Corridor J v Lessons tat vi a Group a v O Departmen Selecting a standard v T Students E v C Description view E C Class L C Teacher Subject a Room vi O Lessons tat Master Data Views Please note that each element type can only have one standard Note view and that standard views cannot be deleted or used for queries The Query function will be described in more detail in the following chapter The names of the predefined standard formats consist of the first three letters of the applicable element These standard formats are particularly useful for beginners since all the important fields where data should be entered in the grid view are already activated In addition to the standard formats the software provides predefined Class Teacher Subject and Room formats with names ending in Aor B e g Cla Aor Tea B For formats A all the input fields are activated for formats B only the fields for abbreviated name and full name are activated Open a view by double clicking on any cell in the row of the desired view The exception to this rule is the first column Name Double clicking on this field allows you to rename the view Similar to the All Elements window whe
291. se groups Select the option Sort periods on the Layout 2 tab to sort and display the three hair dressing blocks by start date 4 Fi S Timetable 71 Time range 3 Sort periods mia Teacher v E 5 9 2005 14 7 2006 3 Lesson Groups Gru AHD x 2l Full name name 3 Fi Figaro Timetable EE E m amp icm E 5 9 2005 14 7 2006 Mon Tues Wed Thur HOGIA HOG4A Name FB3 FB2 FB 1 gt Time range Show a m p m division line Improve the clarity of a timetable by adding a line to separate morning lessons from afternoon lessons It is also possible to issue a timetable only for afternoon lessons by restricting the timetable to the desired periods Selection range under Timetable Settings see the example on the following page 233 User Defined Views HTML index page with full names See the section Timetables in HTML format on p 252 Use alias for details window legend Displays the alias of the different elements in the timetable details window and the legend e g changes your abbreviated name MA to the common school name Math see section Alias Names on p 70 L No Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Cluster 79 Ander DS PL 3a 3b p ange iperad Curie HE L To 5 Period Number Mo 1 Fr 8 Periods week Do not print empty rows
292. spect max number of main subjects per day for classes P Respect max number of consecutive main subjects for classes gt Boundary period gt Main subjects max once after boundary period P Main subject at least once up to boundary period Please see a detailed description of the boundary period function Note under Weighting parameters on p 112 Under Master Data Subjects gt Code M Main subject Under Master Data Classes gt Max main subjects per day gt Max consecutive main subjects per day Main Subjects 295 296 gp Untis Standard Package Fringe Periods Example Code G Fringe periods and optional subjects Not every subject is attended by every student of a class When this is the case it may be desirable to schedule such subjects at the beginning or the end of a half day in the so called fringe periods to enable students who do not take part in the subject to come to school later or leave school early or have a longer lunch break To enable the software to schedule subjects in fringe periods mark the subject with the code Optional subject or Fringe period under Master Data Subjects The two codes have the same function but can have different weighting settings The following weighting settings instruct the software to schedule optional subjects preferentially in the ast periods of a half day and fringe period subjects either in the first orthe last periods 101x Teachers
293. splay New print view Create a new timetable view see description under New on p 219 based on the timetable that most resembles the print version you want to Printing 237 Print ES Print Preview create Assign a new descriptive name to the new timetable format e g teacher timetable print Customise the period display in the period window and in the row and column headings as described in the previous chapters As a general rule the print version will be identical to the screen display unless you customise the print versions or add additi onal information Headings nu New timetable layout d Tea Print Name Teacher Timetable Print Full name Cancel Name Full nar TeaDiag Teache Teal Teache Teacher 1 Te schedule big table Print N Teacher 1 Teal Teacher 10 O L Teal Q Teacher 10 Tas1NR Teacher 1N Customise headings on printed timetables formats 1 10 and 11 as follows Open the file demo gpn and a class timetable Timetable Classes and the window for editing the headings of individual timetables lt Timetable Settings gt Heading individual timetables Timetable Settings 238 gp Untis Standard Package Printing Per default the full and the abbreviated names of the element will be displayed Layout and format font size alignment font style etc of individual headings c
294. ssons User Defined Views 227 Special text 3 1a Class prier Timetable Cla1 ti Dp Classes w 7 3 2007 28 6 2008 Eok Be t ad Time range FI Displays the text entered for the lesson or the row text entered in the lesson details Monday o Tuesday welfet tty rTeae to window LM rex n PEG Arist S5 RE Nobel Rf L No CI Te Per Teache Sis Sea A Subjec Home Room Tex Double per 1a 1b 2a 2b Ria Voluntary lesson 2 DS 1a PL Ria 14 23 Arist 1a1b SH2 Ria 5 Arist M 1a Ria xu 18a i b Ecc EU j Stud Sp D m Description 176 e h412 Hugo Aa Displays the description entered for the lesson lt Time Time request Displays the time requests entered under the element s master data The example shows the time requests entered for teacher Newton Lesson group Displays the lesson group assigned to the lesson ey WW for use with the Multi Week Timetable module The gt A any df lee E example shows the DS lesson in weeks of type A a m amp j xir E and the PE lesson in weeks of type B i T ree ruis Ti EA Ducum L 3 mm 5 a DT 2 3 92 E 59 m NN sej 9 Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Special text Curie PEG SH2 4 Sport PEB SH1 Rub Spork Thi 1a 1b 228 gp Untis Standard Package User Defined Vie
295. sssanases 81 The tool bar functions oiscrtoencce man ias n emer ne eee ene ene buit teu mI d UE 83 igeisif lec RR Tm 88 The Lessons cci E 88 The PACT AOS AD TT 91 The Codes tab m 93 ThE CIDO d sera E bnatrnin sudcensaneeduamnin mast apeaeveimenss 98 Progr amme internal US sssssisisssisrsnisssiiseriisssiiioiersisiariasa airnn nariais riesis reabrir 98 Data export to external programmes sssssssssise senses 99 Contents Lesson SOUS INC CS sia css case ete 100 PIXCC SUDIECl SEQUENCE a siecsetencecca recone stneecsundac seinen sicetzeneneneseseeemaiesetiananed 101 Sequence iN WOOK as oscbccdatemenut uius ortis ditat venu aude en ME ME aence FUN RUM EDUC 102 SITU AICO US TOSS ONS s dene coelis ebenso matt metui ua aus mp ES 103 Display L SSONS ee 103 Timetable optimisation eese eere eene 105 eaae ECCE 106 The weighting parameters seessseessseeeneeen enne 107 Ie CACHING 1 o P 107 The Teachers 2 tab esse iiseeiise sessi essen nene nn naar nena arn nsn a nnns 108 Respect the max and min number of periods per day for teachers 108 The Classes O 109 TA SDC cue RT scanned een ees 110 The Main Subjects tab ccccccccssssese
296. t By clicking on Delete period gt By pressing the Delete key gt Via the context menu right mouse button see example gt Via Drag amp Drop in the period details window see the chapter Delet g period on p 153 E mple You want to delete the PE lesson of class 4 Activate lesson 74 in the scheduling dialogue of the demo gpn file O De schedule the period Mon 1 via double click The lesson now appears in the list of unscheduled periods together with an entry showing the time of the original placement Mon 1 see example Delete period block e Delete periods of a row Click on Delete periods of one row if you want to delete the entire timetable row of a particular Select the double period Thu 7 8 by high lighting the two periods with the mouse left mouse button and delete both periods at the same time for instance by right clicking see example element e g class 1a Delete activate lesson The Scheduling Dialogue 175 SS Scheduling Dialogue 4 Hugo DE 2b Callas DE Delete period zDel h ect x Delete Activate Less Lock Period lt F7 Delete periods of ane row Suggested swaps Optimisation scheduling Delete periods 2 of one row If you want to delete a non active period and re schedule it y Delete Activate immediately click on lt Delete Activate Lesson gt This de schedules the lesson and automatically activat
297. t room weighting off site code and capacity You can change the relative window proportions at any time by placing the cursor on the dividing line between two windows where the cursor symbol changes to a double arrow see red circle on the figure above Simply drag the line to the desired position By shifting the dividing line one window component can be made to hide another component completely Non editable fields containing data that cannot be modified are shaded grey see example on the right g Teachers Tea Master Data Views Form view Grid view a Non editable fields 15 x False DIES SU ook co OR Name Full name Title First name Value Status Deductions Gauss Dr Carl Friedrich 17 000 Newton Sir Isaac Hugo Victor 25 000 19 000 Andersen Hans Christian 27 000 Aristoteles Callas Maestra Maria Alfred Paul Cervantes Miquel Curie Madame Marie 27 000 25 000 15 000 29 000 24 000 18 000 1 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 2f 28 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views Master Data Lessons Sche Predefined views Classes Teachers R H W WT SE The dialogue box Display Master Data can be accessed via the Students menu item Master Data Display Master Data All Elements Element Rollup A i us Term Overview This window displays all the predefined views on individual rows Departments Ea
298. ta Classes The column Room in the grid view shows that a pseudo room has been assigned to the last two classes 3b and 4 This means that these two classes do not have a designated room of their own View the alternative rooms under Master Data Rooms The alternative room ring is the same as in the example on p 278 The alternative rooms allocated to the two pseudo rooms are R1a and R2a Rooms Roo L ad rj x AHDI x gs eut f Mame Full name IEEE Class Room 1a Class Room 1b Class Room 2a Class Room 2b Class Room 3a R1a Pseudo Room 1 3b Fla Pseudo Room 2 4 Rea Class 4 Mob Pz2 O A class timetable should already be open Open another timetable window via Timetable Rooms 284 gp Untis Standard Package Room Logic Time range ET ES Classes 2 School week B w 17 3 2007 30 6 2008 Mo 24 3 29 Periods week Before room e e e optimisation H X 1a Class 1a Gauss Timetable ET EX z Time wem Clssstes Moats week B T 17 9 2007 30 6 2008 29 Periods week i E Mon j Tues ed Thur Frida Satu TE Tee After room e e e optimisation MERE apar GARS AR Ria eg m A number of columns in the class timetable may be marked Before school starts Select the next week in the date selection box of the timetable window to display the timetable for the days you want to view Ontheclass timetable click several times on Other element
299. ter Entering lessons on p 81 Deleting lessons Deletes individual lessons Alternatively click on the lesson in the grid view or select several lessons by highlighting them and use the Cut function e g Ctrl X Serial Change Replace All Please see a detailed description of this function in the chapter The master data views Filter This function enables you to limit the list of displayed lessons to lessons with a specific attribute gt Startgp Untis and load the file demo gpn gt Open the lesson view for classes Lessons Classes and switch to class 1a You want to find out which lessons teacher Arist teaches to class 1a gt Inthe grid view click on Arist under Teacher and click on lt Fil ter The grid now displays only the rows for Arist The symbol T in the heading of the Teacher column indicates that the view is currently filtered by teacher Lessons Window 85 You can even combine several filter criteria gt Inthe grid view under Per click on a lesson with 5 periods per week and click on lt Filter gt TY Per Teacher S a BE da Ria alif TE Ria sick The view now displays all of teacher Arist s lessons with 5 periods per week Coupling lessons Use this function to couple lessons A detailed description can be 5 Create found in the chapter Entering lessons on p 76 couplings Decoupling lessons Split Up Couplings This function enables you to d
300. ter the symbol amp in the Fri 3 cell and press the Enter key As a visual reminder of the conflict the symbol amp is displayed next to the marker O in the class cell If you cannot see the symbol amp properly simply increase the column width under Settings Teacher and or room clashes Create teacher and or room clashes by entering the symbol amp amp You want to schedule lesson 9 in the Demo2 gpn file for Thursday period 1 P As you can see the class 3a and the teacher New are available but the gymnasium is already occupied P Place the cursor on Thu 1 enter amp amp and press Enters Example The gymnasium on Thu 1 is now double booked with lessons 9 and 32 Alternatively schedule a lesson with conflicts by dragging a period from the list of unscheduled periods see the chapter Scheduling timetable on p 159 2 ja s e le DS NEU MA EN AR AR 3b 2a 2a 2b 4 44 Stud Speci L New PH Gym 3a Arist PH Gym 4 178 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Dialogue Example Moving periods via Drag amp Drop Periods in the scheduling dialogue can be moved in the same way as periods on the timetable and the scheduling timetable Open the file demo gpn and the scheduling dialogue Opena class and a teacher timetable O Switch the class timetable to class 3a and activate the Biology lesson
301. the All Elements window i e by dragging the column to the desired location The figure below demonstrates how to move the last column Department to the third position in the grid directly following the column Full Name The figure on the right shows the result The column Dept is now located directly beside the column Full Moving columns per name Drag amp Drop 7 Teachers Tea A Gauss m IUE sare ValueCorrection 7 ValueCorrection Marked m Change Teacher Timetable Marked m Change Teacher Timetable Ignore i p Ignore i p OT Lock f i Tue T Lock f Tie Don t Print N 7 Time Requests Can Friedrich First name Don t Print N 7 Time Requests Can Friedrich First name Personnel number Personnel number Gauss Full name y Ad Gauss Full name First name Ts N ipti i First name Carl Friedric fer Gauss HM A Carl Friedrick Newton i Isaac Newton Perm Isaac Hugo r Hugo Perm Victor Andersen Hans Christie Drag Andersen Perm Hans Christie Aristoteles ist Aristoteles Perm Callas Maestra Maria D117 Callas Cont Maestra Maria Nobel Alfred D117 Nobel Cont Alfred Rubens Paul D117 Rubens Cont Paul Cervantes Miguel Cervantes Cont Miquel Curie maternal lea Cont Madame Marie D117 i Curie maternal lea Cont Madame Marie Cont Cont 32 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views E Grid Adjustment Cancel Inactive C Query A The gri
302. the half day by entering the time request 3 under Master Data Subjects You can also control the scheduling of fringe period subjects and optional subjects exclusively via the time request function However the optimisation tool will profit from a higher degree of flexibility when working with weighting settings rather than time requests The Main Subjects tab Main subjects can be defined under Rooms l Period Distribution n Teachers Teachers Classes Master Data Subjects Unimportant Extremely important Respect maximum numberof gt aaa main subjects per day for classes Weighting 111 Example e Time requests Note Time Requests Analysis Subjects Main Subjects Controls the level of compliance with Boundary period for the following aspects the specification Maxi mum nu mber of PRSE s Main subjects max once after boundary period main subjects per day entered on the a es y Main subject at least once up to boundary period Timetable tab or in the grid view under Master Data Classes Main Subjects Tab 112 gp Untis Standard Package Weighting Note Example Respect max no of consecutive main subject periods for classes On the Timetable tab or in the grid view under Master Data Classes you can specify the number of main subjects that may be scheduled in sequence for a class This weighting controls the level of importance of the settings Input b
303. tion The difference between simultaneous lessons and coupled lessons is that the optimisation tool is permitted to split simultaneous lessons Coupled lessons by contrast can never be split Display Lessons The Display Lessons window contains a list of all the different lesson views Here you can open views create new views and delete existing views compare master data views Please note that you can include your personal lesson views in the menu by ticking the option In menu P ni 5 Display Lessons Teacher Teacher Subject All Subject Teacher Class Teacher Class A Teacher Subject it Subject NOOB epg K Teacher Teacher L Tea Value Teachers ales L Maon sched Non scheduled period sonos Lesson Sequences Lessons Scheduling Timetab Classes Teachers Matrix Term Overview Locked Lessons Deductions Teacher Assignment Team Optimisation Subject Bottle Necks Emphasis Periods Lesson Table Syllabus Lesson Sequence Lesson Groups Subject All Teachers Values 103 104 gp Untis Standard Package EU la Class la Gauss Timetable Clai Religious Ed German Mathematics Mobel Fuben Arist Rib 12 Rib Mathematics English English Religious Ed English Arist Arist Arist Mabel Arist Rib Ria Rib 12 German Religious Ed Mathematics English English Mathematics Ruben Mobel Arist Arist Arist Arist Rib Ria 12 RIG Rib Girl
304. tion the room weighting of the subject room is set to 4 the lesson will notbe scheduled unless a suitable subject room can be found 114 gp Untis Standard Package Weighting Teachers Rooms Teachers Classes Period Distribution Unimportant Extremely important The same subject cannot be taught more than once on the same day Avoid errors with double periods Optimisation of the off site rooms Controls the level of compliance with the specified walking times required to reach off site buildings external sites Please see the chapter Off site rooms on p 290 for further details Take room capacity into consideration As a rule the optimisation tool and the room optimisation function attempt to allocate a room with a room capacity appropriate for the number of students in the class If this presents a problem the programme searches for a room that is slightly larger than required In extreme cases the software may allocate a room that is slightly smaller than required Subjects Main Subjects The Period Distribution tab Time Requests Analysis The same subject cannot be taught more than once on the same day 2 periods week subjects not on consecutive days 3 periods week subjects not on consecutive days op e C fi e S t h at a S u bj e ct m u st n ot b e Even distribution of periods of a subject across the day Try to place the same lesson at the same time on different days Large blocks
305. tiq mn hE Makedim O 7 40 O Ww mm Mark H Marked im Teese nl Lock x O 8 40 O 0 Klock H onoet D Te Ignore i 3g 400 O0 filgnorl C Lock w Don t Print N 10 400 0 N Dond C DontPrintiN sears Cail Friedrich First name Do Stat Code s 11 1000 D Statistica 4 Personnel No P 12 1000 D Personn me aana eet Title 13 1n 1 n Title TET lt TT Carl Friedrich Gauss m Isaac Newton Master Data Views Seles Timetable Values Description Dept 1 D22 D333 D22 Curie Madame Marie Curie maternal leave starts on 10 Nov Sort in descending order 33 34 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views Note Sorting via the grid adjustment dialogue results in a permanent sorting order This only applies to the corresponding view and has no effect on other views or the print order Sort other views or the print order by moving the data in the data structure on which the programme is based Detailed instructions on how to move element rows in a master data view can be found in the chapter Moving elements on p 43 Note Please note that the sorting functions via the grid adjustment dialogue and via the Sort button employ different methods for managing lower upper case characters and special characters Creating a new view for teachers You can create customized views at any time gt Open the master data view from the pr
306. tive room The All Elements window provides a number of input aids for use with the third type of input fields described above Please see the examples in the following chapter Open the demo file demo gpn and open the All Elements window Activate the element type Class and delete the field Room for all classes by pressing the Delete key Entering data using Drag amp Drop from the Element Rollup Element Rollup Open the element rollup via the button lt Element Rollup gt or via the menu Master Data The sole purpose of the element rollup is to enter master data elements via Drag amp Drop gt Select the element type Room from the element rollup list Name Full name meth cL wis n apo al CLIT Peary ML cus P Select room Ria 3 pol all E Gymnasium 5H2 ed Gym PL Physics lab 4f Master Data Class T 1 HER ome Econ room 3 a TUNES Class Room 1a i XK S gt Ej ia um DeFaultLight ar Blass Room 1b D lass Room 2a Css Teacner Room Subject Students a Sis Hoi 2b Name Full name eem Text Lunch break Main subj day s Dragi Fioom 3a la Class1a Gauss 12 Z Ps1 Pseudo Room 1 3E 1b Class 1b Newton T2 4 h Ps2 Pseudo Room 2 4 2 Class 2a Hugo 4 2 Class 2b Andersen 4 3a Class 3a Aristoteles f 3b Class 3b Callas Drop 12 4 b 4 Class 4 Nobel
307. ts Hall 1 SH2 4 3 3 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 OOO amp OO Oooo Settings Use the button lt Settings gt to change font font size and similar formatting Master data properties In principle all you need to do to construct a timetable automatically is to enter a name in the Name field As a general rule it is always preferable to leave a field empty if the meaning is at all unclear rather than to restrict the optimisation algorithm by entering a large number of unnecessary data If you are unfamiliar with this programme we would therefore recommend that you only enter master data in the small number of fields displayed in the standard grid view All other input options should only be used at a later date when you have familiarized yourself with the software and have gained some experience with working with the optimisation tool Master Data Properties Element independent input fields The following section describes the input fields relevant forall ism e ements Don t Print N 7 Time Requests l Curie Full name Editable fields maternal leave starts c Text Eont Description N ame Statistical Code This is a specific abbreviated name used to identify the corresponding element in the programme You must enter a name for each element In principle nothing prevents you from assigning an identical name to two different types of element e g 1a for class 1a and also for the classroom of class 1a
308. ts Max r Ss 7 seater Cote Curie lesson 97 Una oe oa Cr gt Click on Create Couplings gt gt The coupling dialogue appears As you can see the active EH Create couplings lesson 97 is already displayed on the list 4 Switch the lesson view to teacher Cer and ee eee lesson 96 This number is now also active in the coupling dialogue gt Click on Add P The lesson number 96 now appears in the couplings list Lessons Timetable Codes Vabas Vz 1 Petiods week name E oup 3 Mg gt AY underneath lesson 97 EN Sube 5 ir eo emr E P Close the coupling window by M clicking on OK The originally separate lessons taught by Cervantes and Curie now appear as a single lesson with the same lesson number Teacher Subject Classes Subject Home Room Male Female Line text Stat Cod Line value EN la Fla 2 Curie FR 1b Rib Use the button Extended de coupling to decouple the individual coupling rows to form single lessons For a detailed description of this function please see the chapter The tool bar functions below Entering data in the lesson details window The data in the lesson detail window can be edited at any time Lessons Window 83 Extended n de coupling Teacher suhie Class ez Subject Home Roorr Male Female ue text Stat Code s Line text al P 1 Huga GEc aj b 2a 2b Ria 3 M TREES
309. ts in consecutive periods Please also see the chapter Subject sequence under User tips Students The Student Timetable module contains the additional master data element Students When this module is not installed the menu item is deactivated Departments You can assign each master data element to a department teachers can be assigned to any number of departments This is an important function for use with the module Department Timetable When this module is not installed the department name will only be used for information and on printouts The function also allows timetables to be printed separately for individual departments Master Data Properties Student Timetable module Department Timetables module 69 70 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties Break Super vision module SS Descriptions Des Head Teacher Stat Coders Permanent Teacher Contract Teacher Special Class Voluntary Exercise For Girls Only Corridors The module Break Supervision for scheduling break supervision in corridors requires the user to specify the corridors to be supervised The menu item can only be used in connection with the Break Supervision module Descriptions Descriptions are master data in their own right and have their own abbreviated and full names Descriptions are useful when the same denomination refers to several different elements ipixi The full name of a
310. ubj per day This function determines how many main subject periods may be taught consecutively on any one day P NTPs allowed As a rule NTP s Non Teaching Periods should be avoided at all cost Possible exceptions are NTP s for pseudo classes and class components F Lesson not on adjac days Use this function for part time classes that do not have lessons every day of the week if you want to avoid scheduling lessons on consecutive days L Lunch break z NTP The lunch break should be regarded as a NTP When this option is activated the optimisation function will treat the lunch break as an undesirable window period effectively cancelling the lunch break H Sched a m p m not both This function ensures that lessons can only be scheduled for one half day of the day i e gp Untis can allocate lessons either in the morning OR in the afternoon of the same day Y Keep curr loading pattern Tick this option if you want to block the allocation of lessons before the first and after the last periods already scheduled for use with a subsequent optimisation run Master Data Properties 61 Time grid showing permitted scheduling options for use with a subsequent optimisation run where option Y is activated the last morning lesson is period 5 the first afternoon lessons is period 6 62 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Properties Warning This means that a subsequent optimisation run i
311. ue display Displaying all teachers of a class Place the cursor in a class row to display the timetables of all teachers involved in this class Teachers not assigned to teach a class in this period are listed first followed by uncoupled teachers Place the cursor in a teacher row to display the timetables of all classes in which the teacher is involved Displaying all classes teachers and rooms Use this function to display all classes teachers and rooms in your school in the timetable rows of the scheduling dialogue If you only want classes to be displayed hold down the Shift key while calling up this function Place the cursor in a teacher row if you want all the teachers to be listed first under the active lesson In the same way place the cursor on a room or class row if you want rooms or classes to be listed first Displaying a second lesson Ce ge This function displays not only the HAE Display 4 p ond lc active lesson but also the lesson f on which you have placed the cursor The function also allows you to display additional information on the cursor selected lesson Deleting rows Use this function to delete all the rows in the timetable window below the cursor position Please note that the active lesson will still be displayed on the screen Teachers of L this class qn All classes a teachers Display a 2ndlesson ES Delete rows 188 gp Untis Standard Packa
312. un The module Lesson Planning offers an extended version of this function Automated teacher swaps can only be carried out when at least one of the following two conditions can be met P The code V Variable teacher is active for some lessons P The function teachers is active for some lessons for use with the module Lesson Planning and Value Calculation V Variable teacher Ateacher may only be swapped if the code V Variable teacher has been activated You can find this option on the Codes tab under Lessons Teachers A teacher who is the cause of an optimisation bottleneck and for whom the code V is active may be replaced with another teacher As a rule the code V applies to a the teachers of a lesson Tick the option Teacher allocation locked in the appropriate row in the lesson details window under Lessons Teachers if an individual teacher involved in the lesson should not be swapped under any circumstances This deactivates the code V for this particular teacher in this coupled lesson see example below Teacher Subjecl Class es Subject room Home Room Teacher Teacher allocation locked 1 Arist PEG lab SH2 Fila 2 Rub PEB alb SHI Rib Optimisation 131 2 Teacher For use with the Lesson Planning module This function enables the software to search for a suitably qualified teacher for the lessons for which this function is active E n E pe POET SS C
313. unctions by ticking the box Lock timetable conditionally and increasing the percentage under Of periods to be scheduled the software proceeds by first locking the previous timetable then scheduling the remaining periods and finally carrying out a swap optimisation run for all the periods Only requested days off for teachers Tick this option to instruct the software to schedule only the free days specified under time requests for teachers and no additio nal days Consider room capacity Activate this function to instruct the optimisation tool to compare the specified room capacity with the number of students in a class or lesson and allocate rooms accordingly Increase percentage by This input field is designed for use with strategies C and D and will be discussed in a later chapter Note Optimisation 129 130 gp Untis Standard Package Optmisation R Place in a fringe period S Schedule class group later Pets Ietisan once day v Variable teacher U p m only double periods M Schedule manually Teacher assignment during optimisation When the software encounters bottlenecks during the optimisation run see also the chapter CCC analysis the programme attempts to bypass them by swapping teachers If the software finds a suitable teacher and if a swap with this teacher would improve the quality of the timetable the programme automatically proceeds with the swap during the optimisation r
314. utes Modify these settings by placing a tick in the column Full name on the General tab of the grid adjustment dialogue This will cause the full name of the view to be displayed and printed see the column Room in the following example 41 42 gp Untis Standard Package Master Data Views gp Untis 2007 Timetable 2007 2008 Testschaal DEMO 05 035 07 22 29 Valid fram 10 October Far demo andtestonly Class 12 Female students Male students Mame Full name Room Main subj day Consec Pers Female puplls Male pupils la Clessla Gauss ClassRoomta 4 e So 12 G 1b ClessTb Newton Class Room 1b Clss2a Hugo ClassRoomza 4 2 o mO 14 2b Class 2h Andersen Class RHnomZh 1 8 3a Class3a Aristoteles Class Rnoom3a Class 4 Nobel Pseudo Room 2 aq 2 t 3b ChssSb Calas PseudoRoomiQGt t VOo O T M pa 2 OU LRL Bold print Class 2a Hugo Class 3b Callas Class 4 Mobel Class b Andersen Class Sa Aristoteles Gruber amp Petters Software The above figure displays the columns for student numbers male and female in bold as well as an additional row displaying the total number of students The settings for these functions can be modified via the Print tab of the grid adjustment dialogue Depending on the type of view xi further print functions may be cies 1 7 P
315. utho Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 4 a O Start and end time Activating this option will display two additional fields in the timetable period that show the times of the start and the end of lessons The fields can be moved and resized as usual User Defined Views In addition to the editing options in the timetable period the software offers a number of additional functions that can be used to customise screen displays and printouts Layout 1 The settings on the Layout 1 tab under Timetable Settings can be used to change the timetable display on the screen and the printout The settings offer options for customizing the layout of headings e g week day period number scheduled periods and free periods The different options for 3D settings only affect the printout of the timetable see the chapter Print Layout on p 240 The only option available for the screen display is the choice between 3D and flat display The colour choice Grey and White under Flat affects the screen and the print display The example shows the room availability of the Physics lab format Roo V1 in the file demo gpn The headings and the scheduled periods are shaded grey free periods are white 8 Layout 01 Individual tin Design layout of fields m Heading 3D layout C Embossed General Selection range Layout 1 Layout 2 HTML 15 x m Scheduled periods m Free periods 3D
316. ve copied the following P The selected elements and P the fields shown in the view in the order in which they appear and the column headings The individual fields are copied to the clipboard separated by tab symbols The tool bar functions The tool bar of each master data window is located at the top of the window This tool bar is a so called floating tool bar which means that you can move the bar to another window edge or drag it to a completely different location on your screen in a separate window The following section describes the different tool bar functions of the master data window Resizing the window This function allows the user to adjust the size of the window frame With the first click on the button Resize windows the outer frame resizes to fit the grid view The second click adjusts the frame to the size of the form view and the third click returns the window to its original size The individual functions can also be called up directly by using the following shortcuts Alt click Fit grid view Ctrl click Fit form view Esc click Return to original size See the example in the chapter The All Elements window on p 21 Grid Adjustment Dialogue A detailed description of the grid adjustment dialogue functions can be found in the chapter The master data views above New Use this button to enter a new element in the view Please see details in the chapter Entering new elements under Th
317. window You will see that the timetable always displays the active element irrespective of the type of element classes teachers rooms or subjects The displayed element changes as does the type of displayed element Locking elements Lock the timetable of a selected element for instance a specific Timetable Interaction 213 Ch Lock Timetable teacher on the screen by pinning it to the screen using the aS eee lt Lock Timetable gt button When a timetable is locked with two pins the displayed element cannot be changed Timetable Layouts gp Untis offers over 80 different predefined timetable layouts The Room schedule big layouts are accessible via the menu item Timetable List All Views Overview classes Show the TT Classes Teachers Rooms Subjects Students Class schedule big Te schedule big Cv ervie rooms Overview Eeachers Each timetable layout has a descriptive full and abbreviated name Click on lt Show the TT gt or double click on the full name of a layout Show the TT to open the timetable Standard layout Select the desired standard layout i e the layout that will be used when you select a timetable from the Timetable menu by ticking the relevant Stan dard box on the list of timetable layouts in the Dis play Timetables window see figure on the right Timetables in the menu In addition you can specify which timetables you want to include in the m
318. ws Break supervision E Displays the break supervision on teacher timetables NE S ut q for use with the Break Supervision module The example shows a teacher timetable from the file demo6 gpn Number of students Displays the number of students entered for a lesson or elective subject on teacher timetables for use with the Student Timetable module Cluster simultaneous lessons Displays the name of the cluster simultaneous lesson groups bands on the timetable for use with the Course Scheduling module Alias alternative name If you want to display a name on the timetable and the printout other than the usual name define an alias name for subjects classes or teachers under Master Data Alias Names To display the alias on the timetable tick the box Timetable in the Alias window and the box Use alias in the timetable Field type Type of names 2 Class Short name Teacher O Full name eriod see example died auis Ps Lesson number f 1a Class 1a Gauss Timetable Cl Jog 5 5 5 a way You can also define one alias name E Bi a v a oh amp for several classes for instance to show that one teacher teaches all the first year classes The classes 1a 1b 1c 1d 1e and 1f can be combined into the one name Year 1 see example EI stud E Element 1a 1b 1c 1d Alias name A
319. xes Save with class teacher or room clash to schedule a lesson with conflicts o Ce Scheduling Periods on the Timetable 153 The period details window displays all the elements of the lessons scheduled at this time Display co on the timetable by activating the option Separate periods in case of clash Layout 2 tab under lt Timetable Settings gt Please also see the chapter Layout 2 in the section Timetable display on p 231 Deleting periods Delete de schedule periods by dragging them to the lesson details window and dropping them Allocating rooms Pe Tire sua torte oom The timetable window also offers options for manual room allocation Use the button lt Allocate Delete this room gt to allocate a room to a scheduled period or to delete rooms already allocated A detailed description of this function can be found under The scheduling timetable in the chapter Allocating rooms on p 160 Allocate Delete this room Allocate the room to Delete roam Allocate rm la single period Lessons BS Tu 4 Also show occupied rooms X Required capac 26 Available rooms Planned Actual Tea Rm Cap Alt Rm Alt HRM Ria Hza Class Room 2a Room capacity 32 154 gp Untis Standard Package The Scheduling Timetable The scheduling timetable Scheduling Timetable Rep The scheduling timetable offers a second method of manually Weighting
320. y a coupled lesson Example Class 1a has a coupled PE lesson on Fri 8 amp Occupied by several different lessons See the chapter Scheduling periods with clashes on p 176 Locked lesson Example The PE lesson of classes 2a and 2b on Thu 7 8 is a locked lesson ale nix t lil SI EE el E SEE EIE Les Time Cia Tes Sub Periods 5 3062008 53 E GEc Nauck All unsched periods elements which take DE E The element is free in this period part in the lesson E Wonday uesday nm Thursday Friday Saturday 1 2 3 4 s s 7 e h 2 s a s le s fr 4 3 4 s e e fx 2 3 4 s e le hh 2 s 4 5 I 7 e fh 2 s Sry E EMEN o um E es ee mE mH EM 6 a X Occupied by a coupled lesson Z Scheduling Diale Active lesson E essons TE x CI e nschedule Information History Chained swaps bail Occupied by the active lesson fan h Ari MA DE fay BRS I aes Bee mo b o SENSN E X Ix 12 X WK ic x X o X Occupied by an uncoupled lesson Details window information about the selected lesson according to the cursor Flags markers for periods in off site rooms Instead of x X lessons in off site rooms are marked y Y for the first off site location and z Z for all other off site locations See also the chapter Off site rooms on p 290 Displaying abbreviated names Instead of flags markers x X amp etc you c
321. y clicking on X Selection As a rule the printout shows the iren contents of the current data grid i e all the columns pase active in the grid at the time of printing The order of Dotais columns in the printed version is identical to the order displayed on the current screen Page setup Cancel Entering new elements The last row in the grid is empty and can be used to enter a new element the row is marked with an asterisk in the first column gt Open the grid for classes gt Click on the last empty row in the column Name and enter 4b see the example on the following page Alternatively click on New in the tool bar D New 20 gp Untis Standard Package All Elements ini xi i X a E aa gi 32 z DeFaultLight cess Leer Room D me sues Name Full name Room Text Main subj day Consec Pers Lunch break Stat Code s Codes da Class 1a Gauss Ria 4 2 12 Z 1b Class 1b Newton Rib 4 2 12 2 2a Class 2a Hugo R2a 4 2 12 2 2b Class 2b Andersen R2b 4 2 12 Z 8a Class 3a ristoteles R3a 4 2 12 Z aT Class 3b Callas Ps1 4 2 12 Z A 4 2 1 3 Z lass 4 Nobel Ps2 DENN Entering new E elements gt Confirm by pressing Tab Enter or one of the cursor keys You have created a new master data element Zi Master Data Class A 2 Cni x i K AD w E 2al ll 32 befautttight 7
322. y large number of weightings are set to O or 1 unimportant not very important or to 5 extremely important Another undesirable situation is a frequency that increases with increasing weighting importance See the two graphs on the left for comparison 3 4 5 Weight These situations are undesirable Frequency Bad weighting distributions Note because they prevent the optimisation tool from working as efficiently as possible The software will still construct a timetable even if itis burdened with a disproportionately large number of settings on O or 1 unimportant not very important However since gp Untis regards a violation of these settings as a relatively minor offence 3 4 5 the resulting timetable may not Weight conform fully to your requirements If by contrast you have selected too many settings of extremely important the optimisation tool will be restricted to the extent that it can only schedule a fraction of the periods For example if you select the setting extremely important for the time requests of both teachers and classes and for Even distribution of periods of a subject across the day on the Period Distribution tab and for Optimisation of room allocation on the Rooms tab you will soon reach a point where it becomes impossible for the software to meet all the requirements The construction of a good timetable is not a matter of frequently selecting the highest weig
323. y points for each double NTP scheduled by the software during optimisation 108 gp Untis Standard Package Weighting Respect lunch break for teachers Applies to the settings entered for minimum maximum length of lunch break for teachers under Master Data Teachers Respect subject sequence teachers Controls the level of importance of the subject sequence codes entered under Lesson Teachers or Master Data Subjects For further details please see the chapter Subject sequences on p 297 Respect breaks at beginning and end of day Controls the level of importance of breaks between days entered on the Timetable tab under Master Data Teachers For further details on breaks between days please see the chapter Master data properties on p 64 Rooms Period Distribution Time Requests Analysis T h e Tea C h ers 2 t a b Teachers Teachers Clases Subjects Main Subjects Unimportant Extremely important Respect the maximum and minimum number of periods per day for teachers Y Respect the maximum number of consecutive periods per day r Periods in last morning slot P Maximum W eighting Controls the level of compliance with the values entered under Master Data Teachers for maximum minimum number of periods per day for teachers Teachers Tab 2 Respect the maximum number of consecutive periods per day Controls the level of compliance with the values e
324. yout 30 however instead of displaying the different days of the week underneath each other they are being shown next to each other Overview timetables of modified periods layouts 20 30 The overview timetables of modified periods offer one possible method for displaying cover data In Cover Planning mode tick the box Only elements with w cover data for a timetable with layout 20 or 30 to display only the timetables of those elements where cover data has been entered for the selected date range see also the section Layout 2 on p 230 The example shows no modifications on the regular timetable for classes 2a 2b and 3b for the week starting 11 9 1a Class 1a Gauss Ti Timetable Cla20B Clases uu week eb Periods iweek E Unscheduled pisse B Timetable comparison Basic Level C Only elements w cove a Classes ve 1 School week hn 17 3 26 Periods week B Unecheduled pers Basic Level Tea Subj Rm Cla Arist EM Rita 1a Time L Mo Tea Subj Rm Cla Time Stud Specialtext Cluster Arist EM Ria 1a 3 User Defined Views User defined views Timetable views in gp Untis can be customized quickly and easily to meet the individual Timetable Reports Set Classes requirements of your school This chapter fears 1 1 Rooms describes how to customise the timetable sets Ed display to reflect your personal preferences ECIICN M Class

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents